Technical Booklet GB-ML 600 G em - Pesquera Landes Dalcahue - 010517 PDF

COMPANY CERTIFIED ISO 9001
TECHNICAL BOOKLET
GB-ML 600 G EM
N. 10076
500 1328 525 486
500 14 466
310
356
910
418
600
DN 65
233
188
1828
N 8 PRIGIONIERI M12 x 50
46
6
370
1011
TOLLERANZE GENERALI PARTI SMUSSI E

DIMENSIONI 0,5-3 3-6 6-30 30-120 120-400 400-1000 1000-2000 ANGOLI 0-10 10-50 50-120 0,5-3 3-6
RACCORDI
LAVORATE SENZA TOLLERANZA
UNI EN 22768/1 (MEDIA) TOLLERANZE 0,1 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5 0,8 1,2 TOLLERANZE 1 0 30' 0 20' TOLLERANZE 0,2 0,5
Dis. N B04-0105-00 Pagina 1 di 1

Disegnato Rilasciato
GB-ML 600 G EM
Data 15/10/18
Nome AB
Verniciatura / Rivestimento Revis. 00 Scala
Mat. Peso 289,01 kg Data 1:4

La GENERAL BRUCIATORI S.r.l. si riserva a termini di legge la propriet del presente disegno con divieto di riprodurlo o comunicarlo a terzi senza sua autorizzazione.
BURNER
The monoblock structure includes:

- aluminium body casing
- mounting flange with insulating seal
- flame tube in special steel for high temperature
- flame stabilizer disk
- air combustion fan directly coupled to the electric motor
- two poles electric motor for fan operating
- ignition transformer with safety base
- high insulation ignition electrodes
- air-gas combustion mixing head
- pilot gas burner
- progressive and continuous regulation group of the air-gas
capacity completed with the order transmission to air locks and to the
gas regulation valve, with electronic motor
- multiple throttle lock combustion air opening
- throttle valve gas capacity regulation
- UV photoelectric cell
- n. 1 combustion air control pressure switch
NATURAL GAS TRAIN
- main electrovalves (2 pcs)

- gas pilot electrovalves (2 pcs)
- min. gas control pressure switch
- max. gas control pressure switch
- pressure group stabilizer
- valve tightness control with pressure switch
- gas filter
- anti-vibrating joint (OPTIONAL)
- main manual valve (OPTIONAL)
CONTROL PANEL
Built-in electric board for the burner command and control:

- mechanic protection degree IP40
- flame protection logic
- boiler safety circuit ( specifications to be comunicated)
- state optical signals
2. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
GB-ML 600 G EM 0 0 0 0
LOW NOx OPTION

FGR Low NOx flue gas external recirculation
LX Low NOx internal recirculation
LP Low pressure fuel SPECIAL VERSION
DF Double air flow
SF Short flame
V Steam ATOMIZING OPTION
A Compressed air
AC Combustion hot air (only Monoblock burner)
BURNER OPERATION
/2 Two stages
MC Mechanical cam
EM Electronic cam
FUEL TYPE
D Diesel oil
G Natural Gas
N Heavy oil
GN Dual fuel gas / heavy oil
GD Dual fuel gas / diesel oil
MODEL IDENTIFICATION
Size
FAMILY TYPE
ML Monoblock burner
S Monoblock burner
SP Plate Monoblock burner
SR Flame register
SRO Flame register octagonal shape
SRP Plate flame register
SRPO Plate flame register octagonal shape
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
GB-ML
600
950 - 5800 min-max [kW]
1.5 °E at 20 °C - 6 cSt at 20 °C °E - cSt

60°E at 50°C - 450 cSt at 50 °C °E - cSt
95 - 580 min-max [m3n/h]
490 mbar
2" diameter
PROGRESSIVE 2 STAGE
1 - 6 Gas 1 - 4 Diesel oil 1- 4 Heavy oil
-15°C +50°C min-max [°C]
230 V - 50 Hz V - Hz
13000 V - 35 mA V2 - l2mA
8000 V - 20 mA V2 - l2mA
2900 RPM’
11 kW
2450 RPM’
2,2 kW
IP 54 IP
2006/42/CE - 2006/95CE- 2011/65/CE - 2004/108/CE
EN 60204-1 / EN 62233 / EN 61000- 6-2
EN 61000-6-4 / EN 60529
RANGE OVERVIEW
MANUFACTURER’S DECLARATION
We hereby declare that our gas, oil, heavy oil and dual fuel, gas-heavy oil or gas- oil, burners are
manufactured conforming with existing CE, CEI and UNI standards as per separate documentation.
General Bruciatori guarantees that CE certification featuring this burner is also carrying “CE” gas train
and gas line accessories when requested.
The declaration is not binding when burners have been ordered non complying with EC or UNI
standards for installation in special application and or special purposes
Current regulations
UNI-CIG 8041 STANDARD 8041 Pressure air gas burners – terms and definitions.
UNI-CIG 8042 STANDARD Pressure air gas burners – safety rules
UNI-CIG 7128 STANDARD 7128 Home gas systems, supplied by distribution network – term and
definitions
UNI-CIG 7129 STANDARD 7129 Home gas systems, supplied by distribution network – planning,
installation and care.
UNI-CIG 7130 STANDARD 7130 Liquefied petroleum gases domestic systems not supplied by
distribution network – Terms and definitions.
UNI-CIG 7131 STANDARD 7131 Liquefied petroleum gases domestic systems not supplied by
distribution network – planning, installation and maintenance.
UNI-CIG 7824 STANDARD One-block liquid fuel spraying burners – features and test methods.
UNI-CIG 6579 STANDARD Liquid fuels for technical and industrial and civil uses classification and
requirements.
UNI-CIG 8364 STANDARD 8364 Heating system – checking and maintenance.
UNI-CIG 9317 STANDARD 9317 Heating system – management and control.
UNI-CIG/CTI 9221 STANDARD Pressure air burners liquid fuel and gas operated for heat generators
used in beauty farms.
D.P.R. April 27th, 1955 n°547 Rules for the prevention of accidents at work.
LAW December 6th, 1971 n°1083 Fuel gas usage safety rules.
LAW July 13th, 1966 n°615 Regulation against atmospheric pollution.
D.P.R. December 22nd, 1976 n°1391
Enforcement of law July 13th, 1966 n°615.
LAW April 30th, 1976 n°373 Rules for the containment of the buildings technical uses energetic
consumption.
D.P.R. June 28th, 1977 N°1052 Rules for the enforcement of law April 30th, 1976 n°373
LAW MAY 29th, 1982 n°308 Regulations for the containment of the energetic consumption, the
development of the renewable energy sources and the operating of power plant supplied with
combustibles other than hydrocarbons.
LAW MARCH 5th, 1990 n°46“System safety rules.
D.M. JANUARY 26TH 1981 Reference value of the combustion efficiency of the heating plants.
MINISTRY OF THE INTERIOR – CIRCULAR LETTER 11/25/71 N°68 Safety rules for thermal
plants connected to gas pipe network.
MINISTRY OF THE INTERIOR – CIRCULAR LETTER 7/29/71 N°73 Oil or Diesel fuel thermal
plant-rules for enforcement of the regulations against atmospheric pollution; dispositions for fire
prevention.
D.P.R. November 15TH 1996 N°660 Executory regulation of 92/42/EEC directive on the efficiency
requirement of new hot water burners, supplied with liquid or gas fuels.
D.P.R. November 15TH 1996 N°661 Executory regulation of 90/396/EEC directive on gas
equipment.
CERTIFICATO DI SISTEMA DI
GESTIONE
Cer tific at o n .: Dat a P rim a Em issi one : V ali d ità:
74 3 92 -2 01 0 -A Q - IT A -S INCER T 31 ge n na io 201 0 06 l ug li o 2021 – 25 gi u gn o 2 02 4
Data di scadenza dell’ultimo ciclo di certificazione:

25 gi ugno 2021
Dat a de ll' ul tim a r ic e rtific a z io ne :
07 gi ugno 2021
Si c er tific a c he i l si s tem a di ges tion e di
GENERAL BRUCIATORI S.r.l.

V ia A z z ali , 10 - 43 10 0 P ar m a (P R ) - It al ia
È c on fo rm e all o St and a rd:
ISO 9001:2015
Q ue st a c e rtific az ion e è v al ida pe r i l se guen te c a m po app li c at iv o:

Progettazione, produzione, installazione ed assistenza post vendita di bruciatori industriali
(IAF 18)
Luogo e Da ta: P er l'Or ga n ism o di Ce rtif ic az ione :

Vimercate (MB), 06 luglio 2021 DNV - Business Assurance
Via Energy Park, 14, - 20871 Vimercate (MB) - Italy
Zeno Beltrami
M anagem ent R epr esent at iv e
Il m anc at o r ispet to de ll e c on diz ion i st ab ilit e n e l r ego lam ent o di c er tif ic az ione pot rebbe inv ali dar e il c er tific at o.
UN IT A ' A CC R E DIT A T A : DN V B usiness A ssur anc e It a ly S .r.l. , V ia Ene rgy P ar k , 14 - 20871 V im er c at e (M B ) - It a ly - T E L: + 39 68 99 90 5 . w w w .dnv .it
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
CERTIFICATE
Cer tific at e no. : In itial c er tific a tio n dat e : V al id:
74 3 92 -2 01 0 -A Q - IT A -S INCER T 31 Ja n ua r y 201 0 06 July 202 1 – 25 J une 20 24
Ex p ir y da te of l as t c er tific at ion c y c le:

25 June 2021
Dat e of la st re -c e rtific at ion:
07 June 2021
T hi s i s t o c er tify t ha t t he m an a gem en t s y st em o f
GENERAL BRUCIATORI S.r.l.

V ia A z z al i, 10 - 43 10 0 P ar m a (P R ) - It al y
ha s be en f ou nd t o c on fo rm t o the Q ua lity M an agem ent Sy st em st an da rd:
ISO 9001:2015
T hi s c er tific at e i s v al id f o r t he f ol low ing sc op e :

Design, manufacture, installation and after-sales servicing of industrial burners (IAF 18)
P lac e an d dat e: For t h e issu ing of fic e:

Vimercate (MB), 06 July 2021 DNV - Business Assurance
Via Energy Park, 14, - 20871 Vimercate (MB) - Italy
Zeno Beltrami
M anagem ent R epr esent at iv e
Lac k of f u lf ilm ent of c ond it ions as set out i n t h e Cer tif ic at ion A g reem ent m ay r ender t h is Ce rtif ic at e i nv a lid.
A CC R E DIT E D UN IT : DN V B usiness A ssur an c e It a ly S .r.l. , V ia E ner gy P ar k , 14 - 20 871 V im er c at e (M B ) - It aly - T E L: + 39 68 99 905 . w w w .dnv .it
SPETT.LE
CALDERAS INDUSTRIALES SPA
LAS HIGUERAS 25 69
8150215 LA PINTANA SANTIAGO CILE
Certificato n. 2022C0067
DICHIARAZIONE di CONFORMITA’
(All. 2A 2006/42/CE)
Noi, GENERAL BRUCIATORI S.r.L impresa operante nel settore della progettazione, costruzione, installazione e
riparazione bruciatori industriali con sede in via Antonio Azzali n. 10 - Parma - P. Iva 01750730341, iscritta al registro
imprese della CCIAA di Parma n. 176081
Dichiariamo sotto la nostra esclusiva responsabilità che il bruciatore Industriale

Tipo: GB-ML 600 G EM matricola n. 10076
è conforme alla direttiva 2006/42/CE del Parlamento europeo e del Consiglio del 17 maggio 2006 relativa alle
macchine.
GENERAL BRUCIATORI S.r.L company which design, built, install and repair industrial burners, located in via Antonio Azzali n. 10 -
Parma - VAT number 01750730341, registered in the register of companies of the Chamber of Commerce of Parma n. 176081
Declare under own responsibility that:
Type: GB-ML 600 G EM Serial n. 10076
Complies with the requirements of Directive 2006/42/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 17 May 2006 on
machinery.
Il bruciatore è conforme, ove applicabile, alle disposizioni delle seguenti direttive europee:
The burner complies with the requirements of the following European Directives where applicable:
o DIRETTIVA 2014/30/UE Compatibilità elettromagnetica

2014/30/EU EMC Directive
o DIRETTIVA 2014/35/EU sicurezza apparecchi elettrici in bassa tensione

2014/35/EU Low Voltage Directive
o DIRETTIVA 2011/65/UE – 2015/863/UE (RoHS 2)

2011/65/EU - 2015/863/UE( RoHS 2)
Il bruciatore è conforme, ove applicabile, alle disposizioni delle seguenti norme armonizzate:
The burner complies with the requirements of the following harmonised standards where applicable:
o EN ISO 12100:2010
Valutazione del rischio e riduzione del rischio.
Risk assessment and risk reduction.
o EN 267:2020
Bruciatori automatici a tiraggio forzato per combustibili liquidi
Forced draught burners for liquid fuels.
43100 Parma – Italia – Via Azzali ,10Telefoni: (0521) 772051 –– e-mail: gb@generalbruciatori.it 1
Reg. Soc. Trib. Parma n. 21610 – C.C.I.A.A. Parma n. 0176081 – codice Fiscale e Partita IVA n. 01750730341
Capitale Sociale 46.000,00 i.v.
o EN 676:2020
Bruciatori automatici a tiraggio forzato per combustibili gassosi
Forced draught burners for gaseous fuels
o EN 746-2: 2011
Requisiti di sicurezza per sistemi di combustione e trattamento del carburante
Safety requirements for combustion and fuel handling systems
o EN 60204-1:2018
Sicurezza del macchinario. Equipaggiamento elettrico delle macchine
Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines
o EN 61000-6-2:2019
Compatibilità elettromagnetica (EMC)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
o EN 61000-6-4:2019
Compatibilità elettromagnetica (EMC)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
o EN 298:2012
Sistemi automatici di controllo del bruciatore per bruciatori e apparecchi che bruciano combustibili gassosi o liquidi
Automatic burner control systems for burners and appliances burning gaseous or liquid fuels
o EN 12067-2:2004
Dispositivi di regolazione del rapporto aria-gas per bruciatori a gas e apparecchi a gas
Air-gas ratio adjustment devices for gas burners and gas appliances
o EN 50156-1
Electrical equipment for furnaces and ancillary equipment
o EN 62233
Metodi di misura per campi elettromagnetici degli apparecchi elettrici in uso domestico e similari con riferimento
all’esposizione umana
Measurement methods for electromagnetic fields of household appliances and similar apparatus with regard to human exposure
o EN 60529
Gradi di protezione forniti dagli involucri (Codice IP)
degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment
05/09/2022
43100 Parma – Italia – Via Azzali ,10Telefoni: (0521) 772051 –– e-mail: gb@generalbruciatori.it 2
Reg. Soc. Trib. Parma n. 21610 – C.C.I.A.A. Parma n. 0176081 – codice Fiscale e Partita IVA n. 01750730341
Capitale Sociale 46.000,00 i.v.
INSTALLATION MANUAL
1 GENERAL WARNINGS
INSTRUCTION HANDBOOK
The instruction handbook supplied with the boiler is an integral and essential part of the product
and shall be handed in to the user.
Carefully read the handbook and the warnings therein as if provides important information
regarding the installation, use and maintenance of the burner.
Carefully store the handbook for further reference.
Only professionally qualified staff may carry out the installation pursuant to the regulations in force
and following the manufacturer's instructions. Professionally qualified staff means those staff
members having technical skills in the area of heating systems for industrial and private use and
for the production of hot and sanitary water. Installation by manufacturer's approved service
centers is preferred.
Wrong installation may cause damages to people, animals or properties and the manufacturer
shall not be held liable for such damages.
PACKING
After having removed each packing, make sure the contents are not damaged. In case of doubt do
not use the equipment and contact your supplier.
Packing items (wood cage, nails, clips, plastic bags, polystyrene foam, etc.) should be kept out of
the reach of children since they are a potential source of danger and pollution. They should be
collected and disposed of in specifically designated areas.
BURNER ROOM
The burner must be installed in suitable premises with adeguate ventilation openings are provided
by current regulation and sufficient to obtain a correct combustion.
Do not obstruct the premises vent opening, the fan suction grids or any air ducting in order to avoid
two dangers:
1. stagnation in the boiler room of possible toxic and/or explosive mixtures.
2. lack of air in the combustion; it is dangerous, toxic, expansive and polluting.
The burner must be protected from rain, snow and ice.
The room where the burner is located must be clean and free from volatile solid substances which,
recalled from the fan, can obstruct the burner internal ducts or the combustion head.
FUELS
The burner must be supplied with the type of fuel provided, as shown in the equipment plate and in
the user’s handbook.
Fuel supply features and pulverization pressure should be those described in the manual.
The burner combustible delivery system must be calibrated to the burner maximum delivery and
equipped with all the safety and control devices provided by current regulations.
Before entering the combustible to the burner supply duct, carefully clean it and set a suitable filter
in order to avoid possible residuals to jeopardize the burner correct functioning.
Also check the duct correct inside and outside seal.
The liquid combustible tanks must be suitably protected from water and impurity infiltration. During
summer store the tank filled with combustible in order to avoid humidity condensation.
Carefully clean the tank before filling it with combustible.
Protect from ice the tank and the burner supplying duct.
The tank must be built and placed in compliance with current regulations.
Special warnings for the use of gas
Have professional staff verify that:
 the supply line and gas ramp comply with rules and regulations in force.
 That all gas connections are tight.
 That the boiler room vent openings size guarantees the outflow of air as provided by
regulations in force (specify) and is suitable for obtaining a perfect combustion.
Do not use gas piping as grounding for electric equipment.
When not needed, do not leave the burner unnecessarily on and always close the gas cock.
In case of user's extended absence, close the main gas delivery cock of the burner.
POWER SUPPLY
Check the burner power supply corresponds to the one specified on the burner plate and in the
handbook.
The equipment electric safety is obtained when it is correctly connected to an efficient and
compliant with current regulations grounding system. It is necessary to check this essential safety
requirement.
In case of doubt, ask a professional to carry out an accurate inspection of the electric system, as
the manufacturer shall not be held liable for any damage caused by not grounding the equipment.
The electric system must be suitable to the maximum power absorbed by the equipment shown on
the plate. In particular check that the cable size suits the power absorbed by the equipment.
For the equipment connection to the main power system:
 do not use adapters, multiple outlets, extension cords;
 use an omnipolar switch as provided by current safety norms.
In case of damages to the cable, turn off the equipment and contact a professional to replace it.
Do not touch the equipment with wet or moist body parts and/or with bare feet.
Do not pull electric cords.
Do not expose the equipment to weathering (rain, sun, etc.) unless expressly provided for.
Prevent children or inexperienced persons from using the equipment.
BURNER
The burner must be used only for the purposed expressly provided by the manufacturer. Any other
use shall be considered as misuse hence dangerous. More specifically:
 Applied to burners, hot air generators, furnaces or other similar fireboxes, located in an area
protected from weathering.
 Fuel type and pressure, the power voltage and the supply electric current frequency, the
minimum and maximum delivery to which the burner is adjusted, the furnace pressurization,
the furnace size, the ambient temperature, must remain within the values stated in the
instruction handbook.
For any equipment with optional kits, (including electric assemblies) use only original accessories.
It is forbidden to change the equipment in order to modify its efficiency or intended use.
It is forbidden to open or tamper its parts except for those parts included in the maintenance.
Only those parts designated by the manufacturer can be replaced.
Do not touch the burner hot parts. Such parts are usually positioned near the flame and the
combustible pre-heating system – if available – and become hot during operation and remain hot
even after a long shut down of the burner.
In case you decide not the use the equipment for a certain amount of time, it is advisable to turn off
the main power switch of all system parts which use electric power (burner pump, etc.) and to
close the manual valve of the fuel supply duct of the burner. Otherwise, if you decide not to use the
equipment any more, trained staff will have to perform the following operations:
 disconnect the power supply by removing the power cable from the main switch.
 close the fuel supply using the interception manual valve and remove the control hand
wheels from their housing.
Should the equipment be sold or assigned to another owner, or in case of move out, make sure
that this handbook always accompanies the equipment in order to be used for reference by the
new owner and/or installer.
CONTINUOUS OPERATION
For safety reasons the equipment must be stopped every 24 hours for flame control cheching.
BURNER FAILURE
In case of repeated burner lockout do not make more than 3 unlock attempts, but contact a
professional.
In case of the above and/or equipment bad functioning disconnect it avoiding any type of direct
intervention or repair.
Exclusively contact a professional. In case the burner needs to be repaired, such repair can be
exclusively done by manufacturer Service Center using original spare parts only.
The non-compliance of the above can only jeopardize the equipment safety.
GAS LEAKS
If you smell gas:
 close the gas main manual gas valve;
 do not operate the electric switches, the phone or any other object that could cause
sparkles;
 immediately open doors and windows in order to create an air current that purifies the room;
 Ask for professional staff intervention.
2 BURNER MOUNTING
ATTENTION
• All handling operations have to be carried out by specialised personnel.

• Whenever these operations are not handled properly, beware of the risk of burner overturn or
fall down
• Ensure that the burner is moved with suitable means according to its weight
• When unpacked the burner must be move and lifted by means of fork lift
FITTING THE BURNER TO THE BOILER
When installing the burner on to the boiler please proceed as follows:
1 check boiler’s door hole dimension, fix the 4 stud bolts according to the drilling template as shown
in the chapter “BURNER DIMENSION”
2 ensure that the burner blast tube dinetion can match boiler’s hole dimention
3 place the gasket on the burner’s flange
4 install the burner on to the boiler
5 fix the burner to the stud bolts with fixing nuts
7 when burner is secured ensure and seal space between blast tube and refractory lining with
insulating material
Keys
1 Burner
2 Fixing nut
3 Washer
4 Sealing gasket
5 Stud bolt
6 Blast tube
MATCHING THE BURNER WITH THE COMBUSTION CHAMBER
• Ensure that the burner is matching required heat output by checking working fields chart
• Ensure that the matching point is met according to combustion chamber back pressure
• Check combustion chamber size and verify flame dimensions
3 PREMISES FOR A SUCCESSFUL INSTALLATION
Prior to proceeding to installation make sure that:

1) the chimney is build following the section and height values supplied by the boiler manufacturer.
Always pay attention to the following:
a) the boiler-chimney pipe fitting must be short and heavy sloped;
b) do not use external iron plate or asbestos cement material made chimneys; without
insulation coating as they can cause condensation in case of soot at the chimney outlet.
Low temperature in these chimneys cannot assure a good draft;
c) the course of the chimney should not have air seepage;
d) free the top of the chimney from any obstacle. Arrange the cap to let the exhaust-gas
flow out freely ;
e) in mountain areas, chimney sections must be increased by 10% each 500 m. of height
a.s.l; please consider that based on the height above see level, the burner fan efficiency
is reduced and therefore there is a reduction in the burner maximum capacity. The
table contains the approximate values;
Height above Fan capacity

sea level in meters reduction as %
1000 - 6 %
1500 - 11 %
2000 - 16 %
2500 - 21 %
3000 - 27 %
3500 - 32 %
f) prefer circular or beveled angle squared section; using rectangular sections avoid the
bigger side – smaller side ratio to be over 1,5.
2) If you need to line the firebox with firebricks (should it be required by the boiler type) always follow
the instructions of the boiler manufacturer. The lining around the burner stokehole must be carried
out following the burner manufacturer instructions.
3) Burner power supply must be realized following our wiring diagram; prearrange the electrical
connection for the power supply voltage.
4) Fuel tubing must be built following General Bruciatori's diagrams.
5) The nozzle applied to the burner should be suitable to the boiler capacity and replaced if
necessary.
In no event the amount of fuel delivered should exceed the boiler maximum required quantity and
the maximum permitted quantity for the burner.
Make sure that the nozzle spray angle must be such as not to cause any trouble (flame
detachment, plate or combustion stokehole fouling, violent ignition etc.), otherwise replace nozzle
with other one having a suitable spray angle. The fuel delivery must never exceed the maximum
delivery provided for the boiler.
6) Check the stokehole to fit in the firebox as per boiler manufacturer instructions.
FETTLING LINING
The fettling lining in the combustion chamber allows the developing around the flame of a very high
temperature in order to support combustion and protect the boiler dry parts.
It is recommended using good quality fettling material with thermal resistance higher than 1500 °C
(42% ÷ 44% of alumina).
Avoid:
a) an excessive extension of the lining. This is an insulating layer which reduces thermal exchange,
therefore reducing the boiler efficiency;
b) an arrangement which considerably reduces the furnace volume, in order to avoid combustion a
good combustion for lack of space.
Please consider that the current trend among boiler manufacturers is not to provide a fettling lining.
As regards the lining, always follow the instructions of the boiler manufacturer.
The lining around the burner stokehole must be carried out following the burner manufacturer
instructions.
GAS FEEDING
It is not possible to connect the burner directly to the (low pressure) gas pipe network. Thus the
Distributing Company requires the installation of a <<controller>> with gas meter and reducing valve
connected to the medium pressure gas pipe network (some Kg/cm2).
The <<controller>> can be supplied by the Distributing Company or by the user itself following the
specific instructions of the Distributing Company.
The <<controller>> reducing valve must be sized to supply the requested gas delivery at the constant
pressure value estimated for the burner.
We recommend to use huge size reducing valve to attenuate the big increase of pressure that occurs
when the burner stops (by law the gas valves must shut completely in less than a second time). Use
a reducing valve with a delivery capacity (m3/h) double than the maximum estimated for burner..
We recommend to install a reducing valve for each burner.
The gas pipe must be properly sized as a function of the quantity of gas to be delivered. Flow
resistance must be kept within small values.
Install an automatic overflow valve and relevant outer conveying pipe in you estimate or discover
later on that the gas pressure as burner stops reaches unacceptable values. The end of the
conveying pipe must be protected from rain and provided with flame trap.
The overflow valve must be connected with a proper section pipe in the length between the
reducing valve and the first gas interception valve. The overflow valve must be set to
completely release the exceeding pressure.
Flow resistance as a function of the total length and diameter of the pipe are reported in the diagram.
After securing the burner to the boiler (notice that the stokehole must fit in the firebox as per
boiler manufacturer requirements) you can connect it to the gas pipe.
We recommend installing on the pipe a three-part union or a couple of flanges, near to the burner,
in order to easily allow the opening of the shutter and the disassembly of the burner.
Before closing this connection, purge any air left in the piping.
It is essential to install, near the burner, a proper filter. Upstream the filter place a gas
interception (ball) cock.
- INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION OF THE BURNER
Burner installation and calibration shall be carried out by professionals and pursuant to the rules and
regulations in force since a wrong installation can cause damages to persons, animals or
properties for which the manufacturer shall not be held liable.
Make sure that the installer has securely anchored the burner to the heat generator so that the flame
is formed only inside the furnace of the generator itself
Before starting up the burner and at least once a year, have a professional perform the following
operations:
 calibrate the combustible delivery according to the power required by the heat generator and
within the generator delivery range established in the handbook .
 adjust the comburent air delivery in order to obtain a burning efficiency that is at least equal
to the minimum required by current standards.
 perform the furnace check in order to avoid the forming of harmful or polluting non-burnt
materials that are beyond the limits permitted by current standards.
 check the functionality of adjustment and safety devices.
 check the correct functionality of combustion products exhaust duct.
 once all adjustments are completed, check that the mechanical blocks of all adjustment
devices are correctly tightened.
 Make sure that burner use and maintenance instructions are available in the boiler room as
well.
 The burner fuel delivery system should be calibrated to the burner required capacity and
equipped with all the safety and control devices provided by current regulations.
It is hereby waived any contractual or non contractual manufacturer's liability, for damages caused
during installation and use and however for any non-compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Before carrying out any cleaning or maintenance operation, disconnect the equipment from the mains
using the equipment switch and/or through the specific interception means.
Do not obstruct suction or dissipation grids.
4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
Electrical connections should always be made using flexible cables.

The three phase and neutral supply line - of section suitable to the power absorbed by the burner -
should be protected by short circuit, earth dispersion.
All electric lines must be protected with a sheathing and run distant from high temperature parts.
Check that the power supply voltage and frequency is suitable to the burner requirements.
For further details, see each model relevant electric diagram.
φ
ATTENZIONE:
ATTENTION:
CAVI DI POTENZA E CAVI DEI SEGNALI DEVONO PER MOTIVI DI SICUREZZA IN CASO DI MANCANZA
ESSERE SEMPRE SEPARATI DI ALIMENTAZIONE DELLA LINEA TRIFASE È
USARE CAVI SCHERMATI DOVE RICHIESTO NECESSARIO CHE VENGA INTERROTTA
L'ALIMENTAZIONE MONOFASE DEL QUADRO
THE POWER AND SINGNAL CABKES MUST KEPT ELETTRICO
SEPARATED
USE SHIELDED CABLES WHERE REQUIRED FOR SAFETY REASONS, IN THE EVENT OF
THREE-PHASE LINE POWER FAILURE, THE
SINGLE-PHASE POWER SUPPLY OF THE ELECTRICAL
PANEL MUST BE INTERRUPETED
LISTA FOGLI \ INDEX
Foglio Descrizione Revisioni Revisions Foglio Descrizione Revisioni Revisions
Sheet Description Sheet Description
1 COPERTINA / COVER
1A INFORMAZIONI GENERALI / GENERAL INFORMATION
1B AVVERTENZE / WARNINGS
2 LISTA FOGLI / SHEET LISTE
3 ALIMENTAZIONE / POWER SUPPLY
4 MOTORE VENTILATORE / FAN MOTOR
5 CAMMA BT330 / CAM BT330
11 DISPONIBILE / AVAILABLE
12 MORSETTIERE E CONNETTORI / TERMINALS AND CONNECTORS
13 LEGENDA FUNZIONI / FUNCTION LIST
ALIMENTAZIONE 400V
400V POWER SUPPLY
ALIMENTAZIONE 230V
230V POWER SUPPLY
FU34
SICUREZZE ESTERNE
MOTORE
VENTILATORE
FAN
MOTOR
KM81
FR42
BF1
RILEVAZIONE FIAMMA
FLAME DETECTOR
SB62
PULSANTE
EMERGENZA
SE NON PRESENTE
PONTICELLARE
EMERGENCY BUTTON
IF NOT PRESEN
MAKE CONNECTION
TASTIERA
BT330
BT330
KEYBOARD
LAMTEC
LAMTEC
LAMTEC
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
LAMTEC
LAMTEC
LAMTEC
CAVO
CAVO
CAVO
. ..
SERVOMOTORE ARIA SERVOMOTORE GAS

AIR SERVOMOTOR GAS SERVOMOTOR
FR42
KM81
MOTORE VENTILATORE
FAN MOTOR
CAVO
LAMTEC
LAMTEC
CABLE
A PAG 10.5
LCM100
LED1= ERRORE/ERROR
LED2 = TRAFFICO DATI CAN

CAN DATA TRAFFIC
LED3 = TENSIONE DI ALIMENTAZIONE ON

ELECTRIC TENSION ON
LASCIATA LIBERA DA GB
KEPT EMPTY BY GB
LISTA FUNZIONI \ FUNCTIONS LIST
Componente Ref. Funzione Function Componente Ref. Funzione Function Componente Ref. Funzione Function
... TASTIERA EMODE500 BF1 RILEVAZIONE FIAMMA YV86 2^ E.V. PILOTA GAS
=QG BM BM
EMODE DISPLAY FLAME DETECTOR 2^ PILOT GAS VALVE
7 5 8
BT330 CAMME ELETTRONICA HL BLOCCO BRUCIATORE REMOTO YV94 1^ E.V. PRINCIPALE GAS
=QG BM BM
ELECTRONIC CAM BURNER REMOTE LOCKOUT 1^ MAIN GAS VALVE
5 5 9
FR42 RELÈ' TERMICO M42 MOTORE VENTILATORE YV95 2^ E.V. PRINCIPALE GAS
=QG BM BM
THERMAL RELAY FAN MOTOR 2^ MAIN GAS VALVE
4 4 9
FU34 PROTEZIONE AUSILIARI S60 PRESSOSTATO LIMITI

=QG BM
AUXILIARY PROTECTION LIMIT PRESSURE SWITCH
3 6
HL95 PRESENZA FIAMMA S65 PRESSOSTATO MASSIMA GAS

=QG BM
FLAME ON MAX GAS PRESSURE SWITCH
9 6
KM81 MOTORE VENTILATORE S67 PRESSOSTATO ARIA COMBURENTE

=QG BM
FAN MOTOR AIR COMBUSTION PRESSURE
8 6
LCM100 MODULO LOAD CONTROLLER SA60 SEL.BRUCIATORE ON - OFF

=QG BM
LOAD CONTROLLER MODULE BURNER SELECTION ON-OFF
10 6
S64 PRESSOSTATO DI MINIMA GAS/PROVA VALVOLE SB62 EMERGENZA

=QG BM
MINIMUM GAS PRESSURE SWITCH/VALVE TIGHT CONTROL EMERGENCY
6 6
SH34 SELETTORE CIRCUITI AUSILIARI SM104 SONDA MODULAZIONE 4-20mA

=QG BM
AUXILIARY CIRCUITS SELECTOR MODULATION PROBE 4-20mA
3 10
. SERVOMOTORE ARIA TAG88 TRASFORMATORE DI ACCENSIONE GAS

BM BM
AIR SERVOMOTOR GAS IGNITION TRANSFORMER
7 8
.. SERVOMOTORE GAS YV85 1^ E.V. PILOTA GAS

BM BM
GAS SERVOMOTOR 1^ PILOT GAS VALVE
7 8
4) GAS DELIVERY SURVEY
To obtain a rough indication start the burner. When the same comes to the (maximum) rated
delivery note the gas delivery in one minute time (that is the difference between two readings
performed at a minute time distance). Multiplying the obtained value by sixty you will find out the
hourly delivery. The noted gas delivery value is real if the gauge is working at a pressure less than
400 mm CA; on the contrary the noted value must be multiplied by the correction factor, as below.
Then multiply the hourly gas delivery at atmospheric pressure (m3/h) by the gas calorific value to
find out the delivered capacity in Kcal/h that must be equal or very close to the value required
by the burner.
Avoid operating the burner if the delivery is higher than the maximum required for the burner, in
order to avoid damaging it. It is recommended to stop the burner immediately after the reading.
5) GAUGE VALUE CORRECTION
If the gauge operates at a pressure over 400 mm CA it is necessary to multiply the reading by
a correction value.
The values of the correction factor, from time to time, as a function of the gauge gas pressure can
be determined adding to the number one (1) the number stating the gauge gas pressure
value in Kg/cm2.
EXAMPLE N. 1
Gauge gas pressure equal to 2 bar ; multiplying factor is 1 + 2 = 3.
Thence a gauge reading of 100 m2/h must be multiplied by 3 to find out the actual delivery that is
100 m3/h x 3 = 300 m3/h.
EXAMPLE N. 2
Gauge gas pressure equal to 1.2 bar ; multiplying factor is 1 + 1.2 = 2.2.
Therefore a gauge reading of 100 m2/h must be multiplied by 2.2 to find out the actual delivery that
is 100 m3/h x 2.2 = 220 m3/h.
EXAMPLE N. 3
Gauge gas pressure equal to 0.3 bar ; multiplying factor is 1 + 0.3 = 1.3.
Therefore a gauge reading of 100 m2/h must be multiplied by 1.3 to find out the actual delivery that is
100 m3/h x 1.3 = 130 m3/h.
EXAMPLE N. 4
Gauge gas pressure equal to 0.06 bar (600 mm CA); multiplying factor is 1 +0.06 = 1.06.
Therefore a gauge reading of 100 m3/h must be multiplied by 1.06 to find out the actual delivery that
is 100 m3/h x 1.06 = 106 m3/h.
With the burner at maximum delivery, check that the smoke temperature does not exceed the
maximum value required by the manufacturer.
Tighten the small screws against the adjustable ones and lock them with the safety nuts to avoid
casual loosening. Check again, at least visually, the flame in the various position of the modulation
either <<up>> <<increasing>> (+ symbol) or <<down>> <<decreasing>> (- symbol). If necessary
adjust and check again with the instruments the combustion features.
Check the modulation correct automatic operation. Operating properly the sensor applied to the
boiler you must notice an adequate automatic adjustment of the delivery controlled by the modulation
device.
Check the safety devices efficiency.
a) Photoelectric cell remove it from its housing with the burner on and suitably cover it in order to
prevent sensitive part from detecting light. The burner must <<lock out>> within one second (all
gas valves closed, engine stopped, red light on). Press the <<release>> button to check that
manual intervention is required for this operation.
Please note that the opening of the pilot valves can take place only after the cell has detected the
ignition spark. If the spark is missing between the electrodes or if its there but the cell does not
detect it (cell or relevant circuit failure or the cell is not correctly housed), the pilot valves and –
obviously the main ones – do not open.
b) Limit devices: Thermostat, air pressure gauge, level gauge, flow gauge. Other devices if
necessary.
Check that the intervention of each device stops the burner. Check also the need for manual
intervention to reset if provided in the limit device.
c) Air pressure gauge It prevents the burner to ignite if the air pressure in the combustion head is
different from the estimated one. Thus the air pressure gauge must be adjusted to close the
contact (closed during operations by default) when the air pressure in the combustion head
reaches a suitable value. It is clear that the adjustment of the air pressure gauge must be carried
out only during the first part of the burner pre-ventilation phase. The connection circuit of the air
pressure gauge is self-checking; it is necessary for burner operation that the contact estimated
closed on rest (fan stopped and no pressure in the combustion head) to be actually closed.
Otherwise control and check device will not connect.
If the contact which should be closed during operation does not close, the equipment performs the
cycle but the ignition transformer does not connect and gas valves do not open. Thus the burner
<<locks out>>.
d) The gas pressure gauge checks minimum (and maximum, if any) gas pressure and prevent
burner operation when the gas pressure is not within the values provided. It is clear that the gas
minimum pressure gauge uses the contact that is close when the gauge senses a pressure higher
than its calibration one; the gas maximum pressure gauge uses a contact that is close when it
senses a pressure lower than its calibration one.
Thus the gas minimum and maximum pressure gauges must be calibrated when testing the burner
as a function of the pressure sensed in each individual equipment. Check that the circuit opening
of the gas pressure gauge prevents the burner from operate.
USING THE BURNER
The burner operation is completely automatic. Therefore no adjustment is required during operation.
The <<lockout>> position is a safety position to which the burner automatically sets when one of its
components or a system component is not efficient. Therefore before <<releasing>> it is necessary
to check that the cause of the <<lockout>> is not causing a situation of danger.
The lockout may take place for transitory reasons (some water in the fuel, air presence in piping etc.)
and, therefore if released, the burner resumes regular functioning. Do not insist if <<lockouts>> are
repeated (3-4 times consequently). Try to find and correct the cause or ask for Technical Servicing
intervention. The burner can remain <<locked out>> without any time limit.
PART B:
OPERATION
FIRST NATURAL GAS IGNITION
Before starting any specific operation, make sure that the engine and any other drive and control
equipment are suited for the available voltage and frequency and that all the relevant connections
have been made following our diagrams.
Check the stokehole to fit into the firebox as per boiler or furnace manufacturer requirements.
1) Check that the fan engine rotates in the correct direction (manually close the engine solenoid
starter by pressing all the way down the movable part and release immediately in order to check the
revolution direction. If the engine is stated by a star-triangle solenoid starter, it is necessary to
remove the programmer relay and – using a temporary connection – to bring the "phase" to the
terminal corresponding to the engine solenoid starter feed).
2) Loosen the union between the burner and the gas delivery pipe. Slowly open the manual shutoff
cock for a quarter to vent the pipe from the air in it. During this maneuver verify the pressure
downstream the gas reducing valve to keep to the estimated value (refer to the pressure required by
the burner). Otherwise take the properly steps. (In case require the intervention of the Gas
Distributing Company staff.)
When you smell gas close the shutoff cock.
NOTICE: During all the above operations, use any possible caution to avoid small fires or blasts
(smoking and fire lighting forbidden, do not use tools that spark, etc.). Open doors and windows for
at least ten minutes to allow the gas inside the boiler room to exhaust. During this period do not carry
out any other job in the room.
Then shut the union to the gas pipe.
3) Check that the chimney shutter gate is open and that the fume exhaust piping is clear.
4) Check that, on minimum delivery, combustion air and gas gates are correctly positioned in order
to allow the flow required by the ignition flame (small flame). If necessary change the opening of the
gates.
5) Check that the air pressure and gas gauges are set to the correct value. If necessary change the
settings.
6) Open the manual operated valves on the pilot burner pipes, on the main pipe and the ones on the
gas pressure reduction “gearbox”.
7) Turn the modulation control switch to <<stop>> (off) position. Close the main and the burner
switches.
8) Power reaches the cycle programming starter (the contacts of all limit switches assembled must be
closed). The steps preceding burner ignition start. The devices making part of the burner will be
actuated, in the following order:
9) The fan engine actuates determining the pre-ventilation (pre-washing) of the combustion chamber
(any gas not burnt, if any, will exhaust through the chimney).
During this phase check the air pressure gauge to sense the air flow pressure. Otherwise the ignition
transformer and the pilot and main gas valves do not actuate. The equipment locks out. If necessary
change the settings of the air pressure gauge to allow it to intervene. The setting must be done in a
way to determine a ready working (opening and closing) of the air pressure gauge
10) If the air pressure gauge sense pressure and the relevant contact consents, the ignition
transformer inserts at the end of the 60 seconds ventilation. In this way starts the pre-ignition phase
that lasts two seconds.
11) The ignition spark is sensed by the UV photoelectric cell that allows the continuation of the
ignition program opening the <<pilot>> valves.
12) With the valves opened, the gas flows out the pilot burner and ignites. The ignition transformer
turns off. If the photoelectric cell keep on sensing the flame, the main gas valves opens. Then the
pilot burner valves disconnects.
Now the burner is started at minimum air and gas delivery. The programmer relay runs and energizes
the modulation engine. Then it stops on burner working position.
NOTICE: It is likely that the burner <<locks out>> because the two seconds estimated for the
equipment are not enough to first fill up the pipe.
In case of <<lockout>>, unlock and wait for another automatic ignition.
Based on the pipe length it can be necessary to unlock three or four times before obtaining the
<<pilot>> flame.
13) The burner, ignited as per previous instructions, runs at minimum delivery as the modulation
control switch is on <<stop>> position (off) see step 7).
Keeping the burner in this position, check:
a) the flame visual control should not show air excess nor shortage. The flame should be soft, light
blue with orange pink tongues (natural gas).
Change to proper settings, if necessary.
b) burner gas pressure. It should be the one estimated for the burner model. Change the setting of
the pressure reducing valve and/or require the intervention of the Gas Distributing Company, if
necessary.
c) read gas delivery - refer to relevant section - and adjust it to the specific case by acting on controls
(screws and lever).
Please note that the lower calorific value of natural gas at atmospheric pressure is about 8000
Kcal/m3.
d) check the combustion features with the special instruments and take the percentage of carbon
dioxide (CO2) , oxygen (O2) and carbon oxide (CO). You must check that the burner ignites
correctly with the adjustment so far set.
To check correct ignition stop the burner with the manual switch and restart it for a few times.
The ignition of the <<pilot>> and main flame must occur softly and without any delay. Refer to the
relevant chapter of this handbook for delivery survey.
14) Loosen the safety nuts and the relevant locking screws locking those used to adjust the gas.
Turn on modulation and move the switch to <<up>> or <<increase>> or + position. Wait for
the disk where the adjustment screws are applied to cover a 10° angle (corresponding to the
space taken by a screw) then stop modulation.
Check the flame and make a rough adjustment, if necessary.
Then control combustion with special instruments. Change previously made settings.
Progressively repeat the above (the disk should advance 10° each time) to check and if necessary
change the fuel-air ratio during all the modulation run.
Gas delivery must be checked during all over mentioned maneuver to avoid accidentally
overcharge the boiler which could suffer great damages. Each time you perform a combustion
features (CO2 and O2) survey it is necessary to survey also gas delivery. If necessary, change the
gas adjustment in order to obtain the maximum required delivery only at the modulation end-of-
stroke. This condition is required to obtain a good graduality of modulation operation.
Please note that with a correct air-fuel ratio the carbon dioxide (C02) value should increase as the
delivery increases. We recommend not to exceed a value of 10% in C02 in order to avoid operating
with limited excessive air which could cause presence of carbon oxide (CO) due to reasons that
are unavoidable (atmospheric pressure change, small dust particles in the fan air ducts etc.).
Check the oxygen content each time you perform the carbon dioxide survey. The percentage of
free oxygen should be approximately 3%.
While keeping the value of the carbon dioxide (CO2) and oxygen (O2) within the percentages
specified above, there should not be any presence of carbon oxide (CO). For safety reasons check
it out in some points of modulation corresponding to minimum, medium and maximum delivery.
USING THE BURNER
The burner operation is completely automatic. Therefore no adjustment maneuver is required

during operation.
The <<lockout>> position is a safety position to which the burner automatically sets when one of
its components or a system component is not efficient. Therefore before <<releasing>> it is
necessary to check that the cause of the <<lockout>> is not causing a situation of danger.
A <<lockout>> can be temporary and if released the burner resumes its regular operation. Do not
insist if <<lockouts>> are repeated (3-4 times consequently). Try to find and correct the cause or
ask for Technical Servicing intervention.
The burner can remain locked out without any time limit.
1
Guida rapida
BT 320
BT 330
BT 340
SISTEMA DI CONTROLLO ELETTRONICO
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
SISTEMA DE CONTROL ELECTRÓNICO
SYSTÈME DE CONTRÔLE ÉLECTRONIQUE
ISTRUZIONI ORIGINALI (EN)

ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS (EN)
INSTRUCCIONES ORIGINALES (EN)
ISTRUCTIONS ORIGINALES (EN)
2
• This Guide for quick start-up summarises the basic operations that are necessary to start up and set the BT .... control unit. The
information contained here do NOT replace the user manual and are only intended for qualified personnel in charge of control unit
maintenance.
• The information contained in this catalogue is not binding. The manufacturer reserves the right to change the technical data and any
other data it contains.
IN CASE OF PARAMETER SETTING WITH MIXED BURNER, CARRY OUT THE DIESEL FUEL ADJUSTMENTS AS INDICATED
! FOR THE GAS VERSION.
! IMPORTANT / NOTE i INFORMATION I WARNING / ATTENTION
SETTING THE BURNER CURVE..................................................................................................................................................2

SETTING THE IGNITION POINT WITH BURNER IN STAND-BY.................................................................................................5
SETTING WITH BURNER ON.......................................................................................................................................................6
S ETTING OF A NEW CURVE WITH INVERTER.............................................................................................................................9
5 OPERATING CONTROL AND DISPLAYS.....................................................................................................................................14
8 LEAKAGE TEST FOR MAIN GAS VALVES...................................................................................................................................26
11 APPENDIX.....................................................................................................................................................................................28
11.3 CONNECTING DIAGRAMS...........................................................................................................................................................32
2 LIST OF FAULT CODES...............................................................................................................................................................35
3 ASSIGNMENT OF CONFIGURATION FAULT 107........................................................................................................................38
4 ASSIGNMENT OF INTERNAL FAULT 999....................................................................................................................................39
11.6 TECHNICAL DATA.........................................................................................................................................................................45
3
SETTING THE BURNER CURVE
Initial home page: keep thermostat open. Burner remain in stand-by.
Unlock the controller: press ENTER.
nfo
Manual
Setting
Press the right key to position on the Settings icon (indicated with
wrench and hammer)
Press ENTER
4
Press ENTER again
Keep the password “0000“ and confirm with ENTER.
New page, level 1 unlocked.
Right click to EDIT.
Press ENTER.
5
Air & gas position at burner’s ignition

1) ignition position,
2) gas servomotor position (digit),
3) air servomotor position (digit). 2 3
VA L U E S VA RY F R O M B U R N E R TO B U R N E R
! 1
Close the thermostat. the burner starts.
Pre-purge.
The controller moves the servomotors to the ignition position and excites
the ignition transformer.
If the burner starts with those settings, this page will appear:
If the burner does not start with those settings, see page 7.
6
SETTING THE IGNITION POINT WITH BURNER IN STAND-BY
In case of troubles, the burner will go on lock-out mode and the

reason will be indicated on the display.
Check the lock code & press ENTER to unlock.
Press ENTER to modify the positions (burner in stand-by).
Click up to increase the gas opening position or down to decrease it.
Right click to move from gas servomotor adjustment to air

servomotor adjustment.
7
Click up to increase the air opening position or down to decrease it.
Press ENTER to save the new settings.
CLOSE THE THERMOSTAT LINE
SETTING WITH BURNER ON
Check the combustion quality (with a flue gas analyzer).

To modify the combustion valves and adjust servomotors position
(gas and air), press ENTER.
Click up to increase the gas opening position or down to decrease it.
Right click to move from gas servomotor adjustment to air servomotor

adjustment.
8
Click up to increase the air opening position or down to decrease it.
Press ENTER to save the new settings.
Click up to quit the ignition position.
Check the combustion quality in all positions (from minimum to

maximum output) and adjust the gas and air setting if necessary
(as indicated on page 5).
Set the maximum load position 999, according to the maximum

output required by the boiler. If necessary, set the inlet gas pressure
(at the exit of the gas pressure reducer). check again the quality
combustion in all positions and adjust gas and air if necessary (see
page 5).
Press EXIT to quit the combustion settings.

9
Press EXIT again to quit main menu.
Press EXIT again to quit settings.
The burners runs now in automatic mode.
In case of troubles, the burner will go on lock-out mode and the

reason will be indicated on the display.
Check the lock code & press ENTER to unlock.
If the ignition setting is not good enough (e.g. too much air), the
burner cannot start. In that case adjust again the ignition point (see
page 3). otherwise make sure that no other reason may cause the
ignition failure.
10
SETTING OF A NEW CURVE

WITH INVERTER
With inverter modify the curve points only with burner on.
!
• With burner on STANDBY, press enter
• With the arrows
• go on the icon
• press enter
• With the arrows
• go on the icon
• press enter
• check the password 0000
• press enter to confirm.

11
• With the arrows
• go on the icon
• press enter
• press enter to cancel the curve.
• press enter to confirm curve cancellation.
• now the working curve has been cancelled.
• press enter
• press exit
12
• With the arrows
• go on the icon
• press enter
• close the thermostat line
• the burner carries out the pre-wash
• the burner reaches the ignition point
• wait for the air/gas servomotors to reach 0 degrees

• the inverter is set at 30 Hz
• press enter
13
• press enter and set the ignition point using the arrows
• set the values and press enter

The indicated values are recommended.
i
• press enter to confirm the ignition point

• the burner discharges and opens the valves
• with burner on, check the combustion with a combustion analyser
• modify using the arrows
• press enter to store
• press to move onto the (minimum burner) load 200
• press enter
14
• press to set the minimum burner output
• press enter to confirm.
• press to move onto the maximum load 999
• press enter
• press to set the maximum burner output
• press enter to confirm
• check the combustion in all curve points (800-700-600-500-400-

300-250) as in previous the points
• once the adjustment is done, press three times

15
5 OPERATING CONTROL AND DISPLAYS

5.1 UI300 USER INTERFACE 5.2MENU FUNCTIONST
The menu is divided into three paths:
1 2 3 4 INFO
MANUAL
SETTINGS
INFO
Select the INFO path for information about the following:

Display 1 Display • the burner
The display shows in pictograms:
2 Back key • errors that have occurred
• the menu structure
3 Cursor keys • the software version
• operating status
4 Enter key • display of check sums
• parameters
• the serial number
• error messages
• actuating drive positions (current damper position for each
channel)
• •digital inputs/outputs
Back key
Jump to previous window.

MANUAL
Cursor keys Select the MANUAL to
• start and stop the burner manually
You navigate in the menu using the cursor keys. You • adjust the internal burner firing-rate
use the "left'' and ''right'' keys to move step by step to the
selected row. At the end of the selected row, the cursor jumps
to the next row down, if possibleIf the menu has multiple
rows, you can use the "up" and "down" keys to switch rowsTo
display the parameters, switch between the individual fields. SETTINGS
Select the SETTINGS path for information on, and to make settings
for, the following:
ENTER keys
• the password
Press ENTER to call up the menu on the start screen. • the burner settings (display and settings)
You open the selected sub-menu from a menu window. By • the actuator device settings (display)
pressing the ENTER key, you transfer the setting val-ues • the air/fuel control system
from a parameter window.
• the "delete" curve
• the display settings
16
5.3 MAIN MENU 5.4.1 BURNER DETAILS

Display operating hours
• Use the cursor keys to select the menu and
confirm this with Enter .The display shows the "System

Information" menu window.
Fig. 5-2 Display "Main menu"

1 INFORMATION menu path [selected]
2 Display of fuel used
3 Bar graph of internal firing-rate in % (0 - 100)
4 MANUAL menu path Fig. 5-4 Display "System information"
5 Access level 2 1 For display of operating hours [selected]
6 SETTINGS menu path 2 Number of burner start-ups
7 Window number
• Use the keys to select the menu and confirm
1.Use the cursor keys to select a menu and confirm this
with Enter .
with Enter
The display shows the "Display operating hours" menu window.
5.4 INFORMATION MENU PATH
1.Use the cursor keys to select the path and
confirm this with Enter
Fig. 5-5 Display "Operating hours"

1 Pictogram operating hours
2 Total number of operating hours (device connected to mains
voltage)
3 Number of operating hours, oil operation
4 Number of operating hours, gas operation
Display burner start-ups
Fig. 5-3 Display "Menu survey"
1 Selected burner information [selected] • Use the keys in the System Information menu to select
2 Serial number the menu and confirm this with Enter .

3 Fault history
4 Configuration of actual value of actuating outputs (display only)
5 Software version
6 Digital inputs/outputs
7 Check sum display
17
• The display shows the "Start-up counter" menu window. 5.4.3 SOFTWAREVERSION
Display software version
confirm this with Enter .

The display shows the "Software version" menu.
Fig. 5-6 Display "Start-up counter"

1 Pictogram burner start-up
2 Number of burner start-ups, oil operation
3 Number of burner start-ups, gas operation
Fig. 5-9 Software version menu

5.4.2 RECALL FAULT HISTORY 1 Software version pictogram
Display burner faults 2 UI300 software version (user interface)
• Use the cursor keys to select the menu and 3 BT300 software version (BurnerTronic)

5.4.4 DISPLAY OF CHECK SUMS
The display shows the "Fault history selection" menu.
Display check sum

The display shows "CRC16 check sums" menu.
Fig. 5-7 Fault history selection menu

Burner fault pictogram [selected]
• Use the keys to select the menu and confirm
with Enter .
The display shows the "Fault history" menu Fig. 5-10 CRC16 check sums menu
1 Check sums pictogram
2 Check sum, access level 0
Fig. 5-8 Fault history menu CRC16 check sums
1 Error code-display pictogram The check sums are formed from the device parameters. In each
case, the BT300 calculates a check sum for the parameters from
2 Fault code (the last 10 faults are stored, in which no. 01 is the
access levels 0, 1, 2 and 4. This is displayed as a hex-adecimal
most recent fault)
value.The check sums are used to determine whether or not the
3 Diagnostic code 1 value for one or more parameters present in the corresponding
access level has been changed.
4 Diagnostic code 2
5 Number of operating hours at the mo-ment, the fault occurs 5.4.5 SERIAL NUMBER
Information concerning fault and diagnostic codes can be
i found in the list of fault codes.To analyse a fault you always
Display serial number
need the fault code and the diagnostic code D1 or D2. • Use the cursor keys to select the menu and
18
1 2

The display shows the "Serial number" menu.
Fig. 5-13 Digital inputs and outputs menu

1 Digital inputs pictogram [selected]
2 Digital outputs pictogram
Fig. 5-11 Serial number menu
1 Serial number pictogram
• Select the menu and confirm this with Enter .
2 User interface serial number
The display shows "Page 1 of inputs":
3 BurnerTronic serial number
5.4.6 POSITIONS OF ACTUATING DRIVES

Display positions of actuating drives

Fig. 5-14 Page 1 of inputs menu
confirm this with Enter . 1 Digital inputs pictogram
The display shows the "Actuating drives" menu. 2 Jump to next page
3 Fuel selection oil [no]
4 Fuel selection gas [yes]
5 Burner start [yes] - terminal X10
The signals in points 3 and 4 in Fig. 5-14 Page 1 of inputs
i menu are "logical" signals and not "physical". Background:
some signals may have more than one source (terminal,
LSB, field buses, parameters).
Fig. 5-12 Actuating drives menu
Call up second page of inputs
1 Actuating drive pictogram
2 Actuating drive channel 1 (oil) • Use the cursor keys to select the next page and confirm
3 Actuating drive channel 2 (air)
this with Enter .
4 Actuating drive channel 3 (oil) The display shows "Page 2 of inputs":
5 Optional channel OFF; control of frequency converter
6 Actuatuing drive’s actual position
The assignment of the channels is depending on the
i configuration!
5.4.7 CHECK DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS

Check digital inputs 1 Digital inputs pictogram
• Use the cursor keys to select the menu and 2 Jump to next page
3 Oil pressure min present [no] - terminal X05
4 Gas pressure min present [yes] - terminal X05
The display shows the "Digital inputs/outputs" menu.
5 Air pressure min present [yes] - terminal X08
19
Call up third page of inputs

• Use the cursor keys to select the next page and confirm The display shows "Page 1digital outputs" menu:
this with Enter .

The display shows "Page 3 of inputs" :
Fig. 5-18 Page 1 digital outputs menu

Fig. 5-16 Page 3 of inputs menu 2 Jump to next page

1 Digital inputs pictogram 3 Fan [on] - terminal X25
2 Jump to previous page 4 Error [off] - terminal X24 (adjustable with P 809)
3 Jump to next page 5 Ignition transformer [off] - terminal X04
4 Safety interlock chain oil closed [no] - terminal X06 Call up second page of outputs
5 Safety interlock chain gas closed [no]
• Use the cursor keys to select the next page and confirm
6 Safety interlock chain boiler closed [no]
The signals in points 4 and 5 in Fig. 5-15 Page 2 of inputs this with Enter .
i menu are "logical" signals, not "physical". The BT320/330 The display shows "Page 2 digital outputs" menu:
supports either oil or gas operation, but cannot be switched.
There-fore there are no separate signals for the oil or gas
safety interlock chain. The signal on ter-minal X06 is thus
generally known as "safety interlock chain burner".
Call up fourth page of inputs
this with Enter .
The display shows "Page 4 of inputs":
2 Jump to previous page
3 Jump to next page
4 Oil valve 1 [on] - terminal X01
5 Oil valve 2 [off] - terminal X02
6 Oil valve 3 [off] - terminal X03

Call up third page of outputs
1 Digital inputs pictogram
2 Jump to previous page • Use the cursor keys to select the next page and confirm
3 Flame signal present [no] - terminal X21 this with Enter .

4 Fault release [no] - terminal X10 The display shows "Page 3 digital outputs" menu:
5.4.8 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

Check digital outputs

20
Fig. 5-20 Page 3 digital outputs menu 5.5MANUAL MENU PATH

1 Digital outputs pictogram MANUAL
3 Jump to next page Select the MANUAL path to carry out the following actions:
4 Ignition valve [on] - terminal X03 1 switching burner ON and OFF
5 Gas valve 1 [off] - terminal X01 2 burner firing-rate presetting
6 Gas valve 2 [off] - terminal X02 Display MANUAL menu
• Use the cursor keys to select the path and

Call up fourth page of outputs
The display shows the "Manual" menu.
this with Enter .
The display shows "Page 4 digital outputs" menu:
Fig. 5-22 Menu manual

1 Pictogram Manual
2 Start burner manually [off]
3 Adjust burner firing-rate
4 Pictogram confirm settings
3 Oil pump [off] - terminal X26
The "Burner ON" control loop does not need to be switched on to
4 Fuel selection oil [off] - terminal X24 (adjustable with P 809) start the burner from this menu. The user interface assumes control
5 Fuel selection gas [off] - terminal X24 (adjustable with P 809) in this menu.If there is no contact with "Burner ON" signal from other
sources (terminal X10.2), the software switches off the burner when
you exit the menu.
If the burner is switched on manually via display, the BT300 no
! longer responds to the "Burner ON" signal input at connector
X10.2. It is for this reason that limiters, monitors and other
sim-ilar safety functions must not be used with this input!
Leaving the window terminates burner operation!
i
Adjust burner firing-rate
• Use the cursor keys to select the adjustment of the
burner firing-rate in % and confirm this selection with Enter
• Change the burner firing-rate with the cursor keys and

Please note, that you can adjust the burner firing-rate only
i while burner is running.Start the burner before you adjust the
burner firing-rate as mentioned above.
5.6 SETTINGS MENU PATH

21
Display SETTINGS menu Configure program sequence
• Use the cursor keys to select the menu and • Use the cursor keys to select the menu and
confirm this with Enter . confirm this with Enter .

The display shows the "menu survey". The display shows the program sequence overview.
Fig. 5-23 menu survey Fig. 5-25 Overview program sequence

1 Password pictogram (selected) 1 Duration of pre-ventilation [selected]
2 Delete curves 2 Pilot burner oil operation
3 Display program settings 3 Duration of post-ventilation
4 Firing-rate controller settings 4 Valve leakage test
5 Read out actuating outputs configuration 5 Pilot burner gas operation
6 Password settings
Set duration of pre-ventilation
7 Curve settings
8Display settings • Use the cursor keys to select the menu and

5.6.1ENTER PASSWORD
The display shows the "duration of pre-ventilation" menu.
Display menu "password settings"
1 2 3

The display shows the "password setting" menu.
Fig. 5-26 Duration of pre-ventilation menu

1 Duration of pre-ventilation pictogram
2 Pre-ventilation time set
3 Accept value by pressing ENTER
Fig. 5-24 Enter password menu
1 Password pictogram (selected) • Use the cursor keys to select the number you wish
to change.
2 Enter password
• Change the value of the number with the cursor keys .
3 Access level 2 displayed with access au-thorisation
• Use the cursor keys to select the password field you • Confirm the entry with Enter .
wish to change. The countdown starts.
• Change the number with the cursor keys .
• Confirm the password with Enter .

5.6.2 PROGRAM SEQUENCE
22
If both values are equivalent, the value can be accepted by

! pressing ENTER. If there is a dis-crepancy with the values,
terminate the "acceptance" process.
b) Reject the change made to the parameter Select the Back key
.The change made to the parameter is not accepted.The

following page appears:
Fig. 5-27 Secure data transfer

1 UI300 pictogram
2 BT300 pictogram
3 Cancel (back)
4 Parameter number UI300
Fig. 5-29 Display of invalid data transfer
6 Transfer by pressing ENTER (flashing)
1 Pictogram UI300
7 Value for UI300
2 Pictogram BT300
8 Value for BT300
Do not accept the value until the values for UI300 and
i BT300 are the same! The value for the parameter has to be 4 Parameter number BT300
confirmed by pressing ENTER in the space of the count-down 5 Pictogram apply parameters
(8 s)!
6 Value BT300
• Accept or discard the entry
The following sequence of events for confirming or discarding 7 Value UI300
i the entry is exactly the same for all parameter entries. Set duration of post-ventilation
Therefore this process is no longer illustrated in detail in the
following explanations for the parameter settings. • Use the cursor keys to select the menu and
You will simply find this text: "Accept or discard the entry!"
a) Confirm the entry in time by pressing Enter . The display shows the "Duration of post-ventilation" menu.
The value is accepted.The display shows the following page:
1 Duration of post-ventilation pictogram

2 Set duration of post-ventilation
Fig. 5-28 Display after successfully transferred data
3 Accept setting by pressing ENTER
1 Pictogram UI300
2 Pictogram BT300 • Use the cursor keys to select the number you wish
to change.
4 Parameter number BT300
5 Pictogram discard parameters • Confirm the entry with Enter .
6 Value BT300
Accept or discard the entry!
7 Value UI300
Leakage test functions
The change to the parameter is transferred to the burner control
system! • Use the cursor keys to select the menu and
23
The display shows the valve leakage test after flame OFF menu.
The display shows the valve leakage test menu.
Fig. 5-32 Valve leakage test after flame OFF menu

1 Valve leakage test after flame OFF picto-gram
Fig. 5-30 Submenü "Dichheitskontrolle"
2 Display valve leakage test
1 Leakage test ON/OFF
3 Accept setting by pressing Enter
2 Leakage test before ignition
The valve leakage test is set!
3 Leakage test after ignition Access level 2 is required to set this function!!
i
4 Duration of leakage test
Access level 2 is required to set this function! Accept or discard the entry!
i Set duration of valve leakage test
Accept or discard the entry! • Use the cursor keys to select the menu and
Activate valve leakage test prior to ignition
• Use the cursor keys to select the menu and The display shows the "duration of valve leakage test" menu.
• Change the ON/OFF functional state using the cursor keys
and confirm this by pressing Enter .

The display shows the valve leakage test prior to ignition menu.
Fig. 5-33 Valve leakage test menu.

1 Duration of valve leakage test pictogram
2 Set duration of valve leakage test
Fig. 5-31 Valve leakage test prior to ignition menu • Use the cursor keys to select the number you wish
1 Valve leakage test prior to ignition picto-gram to change.
2 Display valve leakage test (active)
The valve leakage test is set! • Confirm the entry with Enter .
i Access level 2 is required to set this function!

Activate the pilot burner in gas operation
Accept or discard the entry! • Use the cursor keys to select the menu and
Check valve leakage test after flame OFF
and confirm this bypressing Enter .
The display shows the "pilot burner in gas operation" menu
and confirm this by pressing Enter .
24
1 Actuating drive position pictogram

2 Display channel 1, oil
3 Display channel 2, air
4 Display channel 3, off
5 Optional channel, off
Curve setting of actuating drives
Fig. 5-34 Pilot burner in gas operation menu
1 Pilot burner in gas operation pictogram • Use the cursor keys to select the menu and
2 Activate the pilot burner in gas operation
3 Accept setting by pressing Enter.
If you keep key pressed for more than 2 seconds in
Access level 2 is required to set this function! i the menue "Curve setting of actu-ating drives" you will cause
i a fault shut-down.
Accept or discard the entry! The display shows the curve setting menu.
Set pilot burner in oil operation

and confirm this bypressing Enter .

Fig. 5-37 curve setting menu
The display shows the "pilot burner in oil operation" menu.
1 Ignition position firing-rate point
2 Set-point channel 1, oil
3 Actual value channel 1, oil
4 Set-point channel 2, air
5 Actual value channel 2, air
Fig. 5-35 Pilot burner in oil operation menu 6 Set-point channel 3, oil
1 Pilot burner in oil operation pictogram 7 Actual value channel 3, oil
2 Activate pilot burner in oil operation 8 Curve data for this firing-rate point already exists
• Use the cursor keys to set the firing-rate point and
Access level 2 is required to set this function!
i confirm with Enter Set-point channel 1 is chosen (di-
splayed in reverse).
Configuration of actuating outputs • Use the cursor keys to set the channel’s actuator
position.
• Use the cursor keys to switch to the next channel.
confirm this with Enter . • Use the cursor keys to set actuator’s position in the
The display shows the configuration of actuating outputs menu. selected firing-rate point.
• Stellen Sie mit den Cursor-Tasten die Position des Stellan-
triebkanals im gewählten Last-punkt ein.
The actuators run to the adjusted position immediatelly after
i adjusting it.
The fan motor mus run to adjust channel 4.
Fig. 5-36 configuration of actuating outputs menu

25

The display changes to the firing-rate selection menu..
• Use key to chang to the settings menu after finishing

the curve settings.
The following firing-rate point are available: Ignition point
i , 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 999
• Set your firing-rate points as described above and confirm it
with Enter .
If you keep key pressed for more than 2 seconds in
i the menue "Curve setting of actu-ating drives" you will cause
a fault shut-down.
Set multi-stage oil operation - 1st stage
Fig. 5-39 3-staged operation

During multi-stage operation, the following points are
i available:
Ignition point ,
1 (first stage),
Fig. 5-38 multi-stage operation menu
1 → 2 (valve switch-on point, second level),
1 Display 1st level
1 ← 2 (valve switch-off point, second level)
2 Set-point, air damper position
2 (second level),
3 Actual value, air damper position
2 → 3 (valve switch-on point, third level),
• Select the first stage and confirm this with Enter . 2 ← 3 (switch-off point, third level), 
The actuating drives move to this positions. 3 (third level)
The set-point position for the first activated ac-
tuating drive is displayed in reverse. Set staged oil operation - transition from first stage to second
stage
• Use the cursor keys to set the position of the selected
actuating drive.
• Use the cursor keys to switch to a different actuating

drive.
• Select Enter .
The positions for all actuating drives of the selected stage are saved.
Fig. 5-40 Transition from first stage to second stage
You have the option of selecting another firing-rate point. 1 Display valve switch-on point, 2nd stage
2 Set-point, air damper position
If you press the key while changing the firing-rate
i point, the change is discarded. 3 Actual value, air damper position
• Select the set-point for the air damper position and confirm
this with Enter .

The actuating drives move to this positions
The set-point position for the active actua-
ting drive is displayed in reverse.
• Use the cursor keys to set the position of the selected

actuating drive.
26
1 Values deleted
• Use the cursor keys to switch to a different actuating
drive. UI300 display settings
• Select Enter
The positions for all actuating drives of the selected firing-rate point
are saved.
You have the option to select another firing-rate point.
Set the other load levels using the same procedure!
i
Delete firing-rate curves Fig. 5-44 Display settings menu
1 UI300 pictogram
• In the "Settings" menu path, use the cursor keys to
2 Brightness
select the menu and confirm by pressing Enter . 3 Contrast
The display shows the "delete curves" menu.
4 Waiting time for screen saver
A "0" value cannot be entered for the screen saver!
i
5.6.3 OTHER DISPLAYS
No connection between UI300 and BT300
Fig. 5-41 Delete curves menu

1 Delete curves pictogram
2 Delete curves selected
3 Confirm deletion of curves
The display shows the "confirmation prompt".
Fig. 5-45 No connection
1 UI300 user interface pictogram
2 Symbol for no connection
3 BT300 burner control
Display shown e.g. when using the LSB remote software and
the communication between BT300 and UI300 is temporarily not
Fig. 5-42 Confirmation prompt of the delete curves menu available.
1 Back to previous menu
Termination
2 Delete values [selected]
3 Proceed with deletion of values
Select Enter .
The curve values are deleted.
The display shows the "values deleted" menu.
Fig. 5-46 Termination

1 Communication error pictogram - no connection available
Fig. 5-43 Values deleted menu

27
8 LEAKAGE TEST FOR MAIN GAS VALVES
Fig. 8-1 Leakage test process diagram

28
8.3 EXHAUST OF TEST LINE OVER THE ROOF

Consider the diameter of the gas line in the roof ventilation.
i For ventilation, plug X02 is activated for 3 sec. Make sure
that this time is sufficient even for the smallest ventilation line
diameter!
Roof ventig
From To the
gas line burner
Fig. 8-2 Wiring proposition for ventilation of the gas line via roof in
combination with BurnerTronic
29
11 APPENDIX
11.1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Fig. 11-1 System overview of BurnerTronic BT300

30
11.2 PROCESS SEQUENCE CHARTS
Key to process sequence charts

Any condition
t1 Waiting for safety interlock chain gas, air any
pressure monitor min. scan
t2 Time for pressure build-up in the gas test 2s
line (only with leakage test activated)
t3 Servo drive running time 30s - 60s
t5 Pre-ventilation period adjustable
t6 Pre-ignition time adjustable
t7 1st safety period 3s gas / 5s oil
t8 Stabilisation period adjustable
t9’ 2nd safety period 3s gas / 5s oil
t10 Operating phase any
t11 Control mode any
t12 Time for pressure relief in the gas test line 3s
t13 Post-ventilation period adjustable
t14 Control elements at base load
t15 After-burning time adjustable
t16 Flame extinguishing check 5s
t17 Leakage test, gas valve 2 30s
Fig. 11-2 Oil with pilot burner BT300

31
Fig. 11-3 Oil without pilot burner BT300
Fig. 11-4 Gas with pilot burner and leakage test BT300
Fig. 11-5 Gas without pilot burner and leakage test BT300
32
Fig. 11-6 Leakage test BT300
t1 Ventilation time, always 2 sec

t2 Delay time always 2 sec
t3 Leakege test time, adjustable
t4 Filling time, adjustable
Signal is present
Signal may be present
Signal must not be present
33
11.3 CONNECTING DIAGRAMS
X30 User Interface UI 300 Maximum Cable Length:

X31 LSB Option X01-X10: 10m
X20-X21: 3m
X32 continuous output 1, e.g. air damper
X22-X23: unlimited
X33 continuous output 2, e.g. gas damper
X24-X26: 10m
X34 continuous output 3 (optional) X30: 1m
(1) SIC = safety interlock chain X31: 1m
(2) 230V AC 47 - 63Hz external fuse protection required (max 10A X32-X34: 3m
slow-blow)
(3) 230V AC for power supply to external devices
34
11.3.2 OPTIONAL CONNECTIONS

FOR THE FLAME SCANNER
Fig. 11-10 Connection ionisation electrode
Fig. 11-11 Connection photo resistance p. ex. Siemens QRB...
Fig. 11-12 Connection of the sensors KLC1000, KLC2002
Fig. 11-13 Connection F200K
Colour code
BK black
BN brown
BU blue
35
11.3.3 LSB MODULE INTEGRATION
Fig. 11-15 Connections of LSB module to BT300

36
2 LIST OF FAULT CODES

Fault Code D1 D2 Description
0 Unknown fault (internal error)
1 Pre-ventilation signal is still active.
2 Parasitic light detected
3 Flame blow-off during ignition
4 Flame blow-off during operation
5 Flame signal does not appear during the first safety time
6 Flame signal extinguishes during stabilization time
7 Flame signal extinguishes during first safety time
8 Flame signal extinguishes during the second safety time
9 Flame signal does not appear during the safety time
10 Flame signal extinguishes during the safety time
11 Monitoring for parasitic light does not last the required 5 seconds
13 Main flame appears during ignition
103 Miscellaneous data invalid
105 Curve data are invalid or not available. Curve set / Fuel number
106 Parameters between both controllers are inconsistent Possible Parameter No.
cause of error: You have uploaded a normal data set (unprotected)
and an error occured during the data transfer. The dataset was
not transferred correctly.
107 Configuration is not valid see chapter 3 Assignment of
Configuration fault 107
120 Different operation modes on both controllers
121 Correction is out of range Channel (x)
141 Channel feedback changes too fast Channel (x)
151 Recirculation damper is deactivated Channel (x)
170 Short circuit of LDR flame detector
191 First monitoring band exceeded for to long Channel (x)
201 First monitoring band fall short for to long Channel (x)
211 Second monitoringband exceeded for to long Channel (x)
221 Second monitoring band fall short for to long Channel (x)
231 Fuel/air ratio control is blocked Channel (x)
241 Actuator doesn´t move, i.e. no position feedback Channel 0 = backward, 1 = forward
251 Actuator cannot find reference position Channel
261 Actuator returns invalid position (difference to target position Channel
too large)
271 Actuator position changes too fast, e.g. slip Channel
281 Actuator feedback not correct Channel
320 Open broken wire at firing rate input
321 Open broken wire at feedback channel Channel (x)
351 Invalid fuel change while burner is running
352 Invalid combination of fuel signals (no signals)
353 Invalid combination of fuel signals (several signals)
362 Fault shut-down due to a missing bruner maintenance
363 Smallest valid O2 value deceeded
371 Outpout for internal firing-rate is defective
372 Difference of the burner firing-rate values between main processor
and watchdog processor is too large
381 Deviation between main processor an watchdog controller too Correction channel
large
391 Curve set has changed during programming
393 Emergency shut-down activated
37

394 Burner ON/OFF signal from the user interface turned off
unexpectedly
451 Being operating mode for ignition not all channels are in ignition Channel
position
600 Program monitoring time (FAT) exceeded
601 Failure during leakage test: gas pressure still active
602 Failure during leakage test: no gas pressure detected
603 Manual venting of the gas line required!
607 Invalid drop of ignition position acknowledgement
608 Invalid drop of the boiler safety interlock chain
609 Invalid drop of the gas safety interlock chain
610 Invalid drop of the oil safety interlocj chain
611 Gas pressure too low
613 Air pressure signal is missing
617 Permanent pilot flame extinguishes during operation
624 Oil pressure too low
711 Invalid change of the operation mode Internal state information
713 Invalid signal combination at input terminals during operating
mode "Burner OFF"
mode "Burner Ready"
mode "Pre-ventilation"
mode "Ignition Position"
mode "Ignition"
719 Fuel valves are open for too long without a flame
720 Ignition transformer activated too long
721 Ignition valve openes for too long
722 Fuel valves open in maintenance mode
723 Ignition process needs too much time
724 Oil pressure too low
725 Oil valves are open while gas is selected
727 Main gas 1 opens unexpectedly
728 All three gas valves open for too long
729 Ignition process lasts for too long (without pilot burner)
730 Maintenance mode without pilot burner
731 Ignition valve opens without pilot burner
732 Invalid signal combination at input terminals during operation
734 Pre-ventilation period falls below the minimum
739 Leakage test: Main gas valve 2 opens for too long
740 Leakage test: Main gas valve 1 leaky
741 Leakage test: Main gas valve 1 opens for too long
742 Leakage test: Main gas valve 2 leaky
743 Flame monitoring: Flame burns for too long after shutdown
745 Program monitoring time exceeded
746 Solenoid valve cannot be switched off
747 Leakage test: Venting into the burner is not allowed
751 The bus-card runs into time-out.
759 Leaving "Setting-mode" automatically after 24 hours
38

760 Fuel change during setting-mode is not allowed
763 Different curve selection on main processor and watchdog
processor
764 CO-controller - internal curve set failure
800 Parameter defective Parameter No.
801 Channel control mode is inconsistent between main processor and Channel
watchdog processor (fatal error, no automatic restart possi-ble)
802 Integration of a channel into the fuel/air ratio control takes too Channel
long (only one automatic restart possible)
803 Channel is locked for too long (fatal error, no automatic restart Channel
possible)
804 Channel mode of the fuel/air ratio control does not match the type Channel
of control (fatal error, no automatic restart possible)
805 Directly controlled channel runs to an invalid position, i.e. a Channel + Date
channel that is not deactivated nor controlled by fuel/air ratio
control
888 Fault interlocking active! Reference no.
889 The gap between two remote fault releases is too short
990 Power failure
921 Output terminal for oil valve defective
922 Output terminal for ignition transformer defective
923 Output terminal for gas valve 1 defective
924 Output terminal for gas valve 2 defective
925 Output terminal for ignition transformer defective
928 Output terminal for oil pump defective
929 Output terminals for fan defective
986 Dynamic range test recognizes an invalid feedback Channel
987 Change-over during staged operation takes too much time
985 VSM diagnosis error possible cause of error: BurnerTronic
expects a VSM module but the exchange of diagnosis data with
the module fails.
988 Fuel selection relay in the DFM is defective or inconsistent
feedback from DFM
989 Plausibility test of actuator feedback in programmed curve failed
990 Power failure
996 Secure parameter writing could not be finished. Device is blocked.
999 Internal Error! See chapter 4 Assignment of internal fault 999
39
3 ASSIGNMENT OF
CONFIGURATION FAULT 107
D1 Description
1 Too many channels in configuration parameter 804.
2 No channel at all configured.
3 Permanent ignition burner configured (parameter 302,
303), but no ignition flame monitoring device present
(parameter 800).
6 Prepurge suppression via external signal not implemented.
7 Fuel change via Off and an unlimited post ventilation
configured.
8 Prepurge time is smaller than minimal prepurge time.
9 For stages oil mode.
13 Australian flame monitoring configured, but no ignition
flame monitoring device.
18 Standby operation at BT300 not allowed.
19 Invalid fuel change selected.
20 BT300 only with separate ignition point.
21 "Ignition With Fan", only useful with pure oil devices.
22 Staged operation only useful with pure oil devices.
23 3-staged operation only works without ignition burner.
24 Permanent operation not allowed (Featureflag).
25 Fuel change not allowed (Featureflag).
26 Too many channels (Featureflag).
27 Staged oil burners need an air channel.
28 There is an invalid function configured for a channel
(Parameter 400-404).
30 Multiple terminals defined for one signal, Terminal
configuration invalid.
31 No output terminal for fan or transformer available.
32 Necessary outputs for operation with oil not available (Oil
pump or oil valve).
33 Necessary outputs for operation with gas not available
(gas valve).
34 An output terminal is needed for the ignition valve, but is
not available in the actual terminal configuration.
40 No input terminal for the air pressure monitor available.
41 No input terminal for the oil safety chain available (oil
pressure min will not be monitored directly, because it can
be included in the safety chain).
42 No input terminal for the gas safety chain or minimum gas
pressure available.
43 The feedback line for the fuel selection is not mapped,
but is required.
40
4 ASSIGNMENT OF INTERNAL FAULT 999
0-1999 internal faults generated from within System API

D1 D2 Description
10 return value of m_PwrOn_uiInitAPI() m_PwrOn_uiInitAPI() failed
20 0 CRC32 check of ROM failed
21 0 Cyclic CRC32 check of ROM during runtime failed
22 Erroneous State State machine for CRC32 check during runtime ran into an invalid state
40 0 m_PwrOn_bLoadEEPROM() failed
92 Directive ATTENTION, wrong number in the wrong module, signaled by hchactab if control
tables are not correct
200 0 Last destination element is no member of sER.sP
201 0 Last destination element is no member of sER.sM
202 0 Last destination element is no member of sER.sC
203 0 Last destination element is no member of sER.sH
204 0 Destination is no member of sER.sX
210 sEECtrl.sChk.uiReadStartAddr Refresh cycle timeout expired
211 sEECtrl.sChk.uiReadStartAddr Uncorrectable error in EEPROM block
212 sEECtrl.eSeq_State Invalid state
215 uiEEFaultAddr Uncorrectable error in Parameter Set
216 uiEEFaultAddr Uncorrectable error in Miscell-Data
217 uiEEFaultAddr Uncorrectable error in Curve Set
220 0 pucDst == NULL
222 uiEEStartAddr Invalid EEPROM address
240 uiEEStartAddr Write beyond end of safety area!
241 uiEEStartAddr Start address in safety area is no multiple of 3
242 uiEEStartAddr Write beyond end of non-safety area!
243 uiEEStartAddr Start address is in reserved area!
244 ulReqFIFOSpace Not enough FIFO space
250 (ulong32)pucDst Readback error while refreshing - possibly defective RAM cell
300 0 Timout sICom.uiRxLiveTimer expired
301 0 Timout sICom.uiRxLiveTimer expired
350 0 Timeout sICom.uixLiveTimer expired
360 0 Timeout while waiting for the exit from DUAL_BEF_CHECK_PARAM
361 0 FIFO ful !
380 uiBPP_HPPunktNr Error while calling uiPutPunkt()
381 0 Seal control command in the presence of BM_FAT_KALTCHECK
382 0 Timeout in the cyclical parameter comparison
383 uiBCP_AnzParam[0] DUAL_BEF_CHANGE_PARAM1: Invalid value in the reception buffer
384 uiBCP_AnzParam[1] DUAL_BEF_CHANGE_PARAM2: Invalid value in the reception buffer
385 sRx.Buffer.ui[ucRxOK-1][uiSTART- Cyclic parameter verification: different parameters between HP and UP!
BEF+47]
386 uiParaIdx PowerOn parameter verification: different parameters between HP and UP!
410 sIO.sIn.ulInputsN Detected positive half-wave on terminal input!
411 input status received from UP Different input status between controllers
412 0 The readback input of the fuel selection relais contacts in the dual fuel is invalid. DFM
probably defect.
420 uil Input status of digital input on HP and UP is inconsistent (>20ms)
430 ucPin2Test Pin short circuit test detected an error!Currently tested pin not configurated as output
or is stuck at 1
431 ucPin2Test Pin short circuit test detected an error!Short-circuit between pins, pull-up of input stage
defective or pin is externally stuck at 0
440 0 sIO.sIn.uiTestSignalTimeout expired
41
D1 D2 Description
450 0 Main power relay (K2) does not switch correctly to off when out of power.
451 ucRelay Relay does not switch correctly, when relay power is enabled (for details see enum
teRelais)
460 uiFaultParam Failure of relais power switching or readback of relay coils of K1 or K2Param2: Bit 0 is
set if readback line of K1 is erroneous, Bit 1 is set if readback line of K2 is erroneous
461 uiFaultParam Readback status of relay K1 or K2 differs from desired switching status, relay propably
defect.Param2:Bit 0: nominal state of K1Bit 1: nominal state of K2Bit 8: state of readback
line of K1Bit 9: state of readback line of K2
500 0 Timeout while waiting for end of write cycle
501 0 SLA+W has been transmitted; NO ACK has been received
502 0 SLA+R has been transmitted; NO ACK has been received
503 0 Data byte has been transmitted; NO ACK has been received
504 0 BUS error due to an illegal START or STOP condition
505 0 Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W or Data bytes
510 ulI2CStat Unknown/invalid state!
600 sSRCtrl.uiOffset Correction of defective triple in Safety RAM structure failed
610 (ulong32)pucDst Invalid destination address
620 (ulong32)puiDst Invalid destination address
630 (ulong32)pulDst Invalid destination address
700 0 CPU selftest failed
701 sSelftest.sMngr.eState state-event-machine failed with AC_ERR
710 sSelftest.sWD.eErrorState Watchdog selftest failed
711 sSelftest.sWD.eState Invalid default case
720 Selftest.sVM.ucTest2Perform Invalid default case
721 Selftest.sVM.eErrorState Supply voltage monitor selftest failed
722 Selftest.sVM.eState Invalid default case
730 sSelftest.sRR.eErrorState Relay release circuit selftest failed
731 sSelftest.sRR.eState Invalid default case
740 sSelftest.sRPW.eErrorState Relay PWR release circuit selftest failed
741 sSelftest.sRPW.eState Invalid default case
750 0: USR-Stack, 1: IRQ-Stack Stack overflow detected
751 0 Stackaddress is NULL-Pointer
752 0 Stackaddress is NULL-Pointer
800 sWDog.ulReleasePtrn1 Trigger release patterns are invalid!
810 eFeedIndex Invalid Feed Index
820 eTriggerCtrl Invalid Trigger Mode
830 0 No valid watchdog trigger received (frequency or duty cycle invalid)
900 uiErrorCode Fault from LPC_API error handler
920 0 Invalid entry in iStoerResRam
930 uiMaskedFaultCode uiMaskedFaultCode out of range!
1200 0 Flame signal doesn't disappear during self-test
1210 sIFD.eTestState Invalid default case
1220 sIFD.uiClock UP is missing test impulses
1221 sIFD.uiClock Test signal duration too short
1222 sIFD.uiClock Test signal duration too short
1240 0 Detected short circuit of LDR
1250 uiADValue Circuit selftest failed, A/D value out of expected range
1260 sLDR.eTestState Invalid default case
1270 sLDR.uiClock Test interval too long
1271 sLDR.uiClock HP released test pin too late
42
1272 sLDR.uiClock HP released test pin too early

1290 uiMyFlames XOR uiPartnerFlames Flame signals on both controllers are inconsistent (bit 0: main flame, bit 1: ignition flame)
1300 0 Pointer to transmit buffer is NULL
1400 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_INTERFACE_INVALID_ACTUATOR_TYPE
1401 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_INTERFACE_INVALID_DIRECTION
1405 0 H_SA_INTERFACE_WRONG_RAMP_CALCULATION
1406 0 ulGradientMax <= ulGradientDesired
1410 0 H_SA_INTERFACE_WRONG_RAMP_CALCULATION
1411 0 H_SA_INTERFACE_ERROR_TIMING
1415 psActuator->ucSANumber psActuator->ucSANumber Invalid!
1420 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_INTERFACE_WRONG_RAMP_CALCULATION
1430 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_FEEDBACK_WRONG_FEEDBACK
1435 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_PLAUSIB_ACTUATOR_OUT_OF_RANGE
1436 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_PLAUSIB_SECTION_COUNT_OUT_OF_RANGE
1440 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_REFERENCE_SEARCH_NO_REFERENCE_FOUND
1450 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_STEPCALC_CALL_COUNT_OVERFLOW
1451 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_STEPCALC_SECTIONCOUNT_OUT_OF_RANGE
1452 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_STEPCALC_INVALID_DIRECTION
1453 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_STEPCALC_SECTIONCOUNT_OUT_OF_RANGE
1454 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_STEPCALC_INVALID_DIRECTION
1455 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_STEPCALC_WRONG_STATUS
1460 0 U_SA_INTERFACE_INVALID_ACTUATOR_TYPE
1461 0 U_SA_INTERFACE_INVALID_DIRECTION
1470 psActuator->ucSANumber U_SA_FEEDBACK_INVALID_DIRECTION
1471 psActuator->ucSANumber U_SA_FEEDBACK_INVALID_DIRECTION
1472 psActuator->ucSANumber U_SA_FEEDBACK_WRONG_FEEDBACK
1480 psActuator->ucSANumber U_SA_REFERENCE_SEARCH_INVALID_ACTUATOR_TYPE
1500 0 Timeout while sending ICOM command
1501 0 Timeout while waiting for ACK of ICOM command
1502 0 Timeout while waiting for end of actuator initilization
1505 Actuator Number HP: Invalid configuration. Parameter for Actuator Type should never be different from 1 or 2
1505 Actuator Number ÜP: Invalid configuration. Parameter for Actuator Type should never be different from 1 or 2
2000-3999 internal faults generated from within Application (FAT and System)
D1 D2 Description
2000 unknwoen event, for the event handling mechanism
2001 too many events for even queue
2100 Invalid buffer input
2101 EEProm probably defective
2200 Invalid Index for SQBLData00
2206 Invalid Index for SQBLDataKurven
2207 Invalid Index for SQBLDataPara
43

2209 Data request for data block, but no transmission.
2300 Invalid state
2301 Invalid state
2302 Deleting curve, end of EI
2303 Invalid state
2304 Invalid state
2305 Invalid parameter number (does not exist)
2306 Invalid state (cold check)
2307 Cold check
2308 Cold check
2309 Cold check
2310 Invalid state
2350 - Cold check
2354 Attempt to write to a modbus register
2400 Modbus register described
2401 Parameter with access level > 4
2500 Does not find the operating mode
2600 Transfer forbidden
2601 Deleting curve, left EI
2700 The air pressure was not droped but the burner still starts
2800 It was opened more than one valve in the cold check
2801 Maintenance mode on the main controller is active, but there is no mainte-
2802 nance mode parameterized
2803 Maintenance mode active but it is still ignite
2804 Burner starts, while the supervisor controller is blocked
2805 Burner starts, while no reference test was made
2806 The stage sent by HP for the staged-operation does not seem plausible
2900 Program load by the timer to high
3000 All errors, for which no error number was registered
3100 Error message of a password module
3101 Error message of the password module
3200 Internal overflow, intermediate result does not fit in the variable
3201 Overflow of the end result
3230 UP Version differs from HP version
3250 Invalid parameter for staged burner-firing-rate controller
3300 Sequence control BrennUm default case entered
3301 Sequence control leakage test default case entered
3302 Sequence control FAT default case
3303 Sequence control post ventilation default case
3304 Sequence control pre ventilation default case entered
3305 Sequence control Ingnition default case entered
4000-4999 Internal faults generated from within Application (Fuel/Air Ratio Control)
D1 D2 Description
4000 0 No curve point to the load of the ignition point
4001 0 ucPIdx_R >= ucPunktAnzahl
4100 sRampe.ucState invalid value of sRampe.ucState
4200 ucVBMode invalid value of ucVBMode
4302 0 No active air channel is defined (parameterization error)
4400 ucSteuerArtEx invalid value of ucSteuerArtEx
4401 0 timeout while waiting for ???
44
4402 ucSteuerArtEx invalid value of ucSteuerArtEx

4403 ucKanStat (ucKanStat & Def_VKM2_MSK) != Def_VKM2_DVAL
4404 0 timeout while waiting for ???
4405 ucKanStat disabled channel is moving!
4406 ucRzStState[ucKnr] invalid value of ucRzStState[ucKnr]
4407 ucVBStat invalid value of ucVBStatn
4500 0 sRampe.uiLaufzeit == 0!
4501 ucKnr IfKM_VB() returned 0
4600 ucVorgabe invalid value of ucVorgabe
4601 (sRampe.uc2VBKMsk No VB channels can be active in VSM_NOVB
sRampe.ucVBKMsk)
4602 sRampT.ucNState Unknown default state
4603 sRampe.ucState invalid value of sRampe.ucState
4700 0 Ramp time expired!
4701 Transferred channel number out of the permitted range
4705 ucKnr Transferred channel number out of the permitted range
4800 uiActTmr ucErg > 0!
4801 ucSgIdx Parameter modification Knf_uiActuatorDirX while fuel/air ratio control is active or outside
the operation modes “Burner Off” or “Fault”
4802 0 Allowed scope for the channel too small to assess the maximum speed
4900 ucKnr Division by 0
5000-5999 Internal faults generated from within Application (firing-rate control)

D1 D2 Description
5000 enInterneLastSeq invalid value of enInterneLastSeq
5001 0 Ambiguous DPS+ / DPS- for load stage selection
5002 0 Curve error: curve for n-staged oil or channel speed for actuators was not determined
5003 0 Invalid parameter in function call
5004 0 Timers for the control of the stage switching time do not fit together: Switch-ing time of
internal load < supervised time for set load
5005 0 Invalid stage curve with internal load set by the stage controller
5007 0 Invalid load value while adjusting the staged oil curve
5008 0 Invalid stage- activation control mode
45
6000-6999 Internal faults generated from within UP Application-Control (Fuel/Air Ratio Control)
D1 D2 Description
6000 ucSteuerArtEx unknown Mode of Channel-Control
6001 ucBetrMoNr Overadressing of Array was detected
6100 ucKnr unknown Mode of Channel-Control
6200 0 Avoid an endless loop
6203 0 SSR.sS0.ucAkt SSR.sS0.uiKanalenb changed without AufrufKurve2Workram
6204 0 No completely valid point found but curve not empty
6205 Detected points No. number of points don’t match Ram-curve (fatal error with task)
6206 Operating curve points index Writing firing-rate failed (Ram-error)
6207 Original curve points index firing-rate point in original curve invalid
6208 Original curve points index invalid point index
6209 0 Point-approximation not possible, no prior point
6210 0 Point-approximation not possible, no following point
6211 0 Point-approximation failed, invalid according point
6212 Operating curve points index Writing setpoint failed (Ram-error)
6213 Original curve points index invalid point-index
6214 0 Point-approximation not possible, no prior point
6215 0 Point-approximation not possible, no following point
6217 Operating curve points index Return setpoint writing failed (Ram-error)
6220 Operating curve points index Evaluated-Correction-Setpoint-Writing failed (Ram-error)
6222 0 Writing failed: Ram-error
6223 0 Writing failed: Ram-error
6224 Error No. Too many differences between curves (sliding counter, substract 1 per cycle)
6225 Status No. undefined state of statemachine
6300 ucSMState Detect undefined State of Statemachine
6400 ucKnr Division by 0
46
11.6 TECHNICAL DATA

11.6.1 TECHNICAL DATA BT300
Function
Power supply: 230V +10/-15% 47-63Hz115V +10/-15% 47-63Hz (on request)
Maximum pre fuse: 10A slow-blow
To be used only in a grounded power line network!
Power consumption: max. 30 VA
Digital signal inputs: The parasitic capacity of the line connected to the digital inputs must
not exceed 2.2mF during the self-tests of the BT300.
Note: Max. line length 10m (see chapter 11.3 Connecting Diagrams)
Digital outputs: 3 fuel valves max. 1 A cos Φ 0,4

VL fan max. 2 A cos Φ 0,4
oil pump max. 2 A cos Φ 0,4
ignition transformer max. 2 A cos Φ 0,2
alarm output max. 1 A cos Φ 0,3
Resolution: 999 digit, 10 bit
Number of curve sets: BT320/330: 1 curve set (oil or gas)
BT340: 2 curve sets (oil / gas switchable; DFM300 or LCM100 necessary)
Number of programs: unlimited (EEPROM)
Fieldbus-coupling (optional): PROFIBUS
LCM100 always required
Housing: Polycarbonate + ABS
Dimensions: 200x115x61mm
Weight: 1,0kg
Flammability: UL-94 V0 (panel: UL-94 V2)
Display
Display: 128x64 pixel, monochrome
White background lightning (dimmable)
Dimensions: 112x64x24
Weight: 140g
Housing: Basic housing: Polyamide glass fibre reinforced LCD-display window: Polycarbonate
Flammability: Basic housing UL-94 V0
LCD-display window UL-94 V2
47
Environmental Conditions
Operation: Climatic conditions Class 3K5 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Mechanic conditions Class 3M5 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Temperature range -20...+60°C (no condensation)
Transport: Climatic conditions Class 2K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Storage: Climatic conditions Class 1K3 according to DIN EN 60721-3
Electronic safety: Degree of protection (DIN EN60529): BT300: IP40 housing IP20 terminals
UI300 IP40 (clamping) IP54 (glued assembly)
11.6.2 ACTUATORS 662R550...
Function
Floating time 5s / 90° at 180 Hz
Direction of rotation 0° to 90° right
Torque 0.8 Nm (both directions)
Holding torque 0.4 Nm (no power)
0.7 Nm
Permissible radial load 30 Nm (centre of output shaft)
Permissible axial load 5N
Axial play of drive shaft 0.1...0.2 mm
Environmental conditions
Operation Climatic condition class 3K3 as per DIN EN 60721-3
Mechanical condition class 3M3 as per DIN EN 60721-3
Temperature range -20...+60? (no condensation)
Transport Climatic condition class 2K3 as per DIN EN 60721-3
Storage Climatic condition class 1K3 as per DIN EN 60721-3
Bursting strength Peak voltage 4 kV
Repeat frequency 2,5 kHz
Electrical safety Protection class 2 as per DIN EN 60730
48
11.6.3 ACTUATORS 662R5001... / 662R5003...
Function 662R5001... 662R5003... 662R5010...

Floating time 5s / 90° 5s / 90° 15s / 90°
Direction of rotation 0° to 90° left - view to the drive shaft
Effective output torque 1.2 Nm (both directions of rotation) 3 Nm (both directions of rotation) 10 Nm (both directions of
rotation)
Holding torque 0.82 Nm (no power) 2.8 Nm (no power) 6 Nm (no power)
Permissible radial load 100 N (centre of output shaft)
Permissible axial load 10 N
Axial play of drive shaft 0.1...0.2 mm 0.1...0.2 mm
Motor RDM 51/6 stepper motor
Angular resolution 0.1° / motor step 0.1° / motor step 0.03° / motor step
Rated resolution encoder 0,7°
monitoring
Monitoring accuracy ±0,5° ±0,5° ±1,3125 (is equal to 44 motor
steps)
Repeat accuracy ±0,1° ± 0,1° ± 0,1°
Service life 2 000 000 motions forward and back distributed over the total actuation range
Degree of protection IP54 according to DIN EN 60529-1
Weight 1400g
Environmental conditions 662R5001... / 662R5003... / 662R5010...

Operation Climatic condition class 3K5 as per DIN EN 60721-3
Transport Climatic condition class 2K3 as per DIN EN 60721-3
Storage Climatic condition class 1K3 as per DIN EN 60721-3
Bursting strength Peak voltage 4 kV
Repeat frequency 2,5 kHz
Electrical safety Protection class 2 as per DIN EN 60730
49
• Esta Guía para el arranque rápido resume las operaciones básicas necesarias para activar y programar la central BT... La información
que contiene NO sustituye al manual del usuario y está dirigida exclusivamente al personal
• cualificado para el mantenimiento de la central.
• El presente catálogo tiene carácter meramente indicativo. El fabricante, por tanto, se reserva cualquier posibilidad de modificación de
los datos técnicos y de todo lo indicado en el mismo.
EN CASO DE CONFIGURACIÓN DE LOS PARÁMETROS CON QUEMADOR MIXTO, EFECTUAR LAS REGULACIONES DEL
! DEL GASÓLEO COMO SE INDICA EN LA VERSIÓN PARA GAS.
! IMPORTANTE/NOTA i INFORMACIÓN I ADVERTENCIA/ ATENCIÓN
CONFIGURACIÓN DE LA CURVA DEL QUEMADOR..................................................................................................................2

CONFIGURACIÓN DEL PUNTO DE ENCENDIDO CON EL QUEMADOR EN STAND-BY.........................................................5
CONFIGURACIÓN CON EL QUEMADOR ENCENDIDO..............................................................................................................6
CONFIGURACIÓN DE UNA NUEVA CURVA CON INVÉRTER....................................................................................................9
5 DISPOSITIVO DE MANDO Y PANTALLAS...................................................................................................................................14
8 PRUEBA DE ESTANQUEIDAD DE LAS VÁLVULAS PRINCIPALES DE GAS.............................................................................26
11 APÉNDICE.....................................................................................................................................................................................28
11.3 DIAGRAMAS DE CONEXIÓN.......................................................................................................................................................32
2 LISTADO DE LOS CÓDIGOS DE LOS ERRORES.......................................................................................................................35
3 ASIGNACIÓN DEL ERROR DE CONFIGURACIÓN 107..............................................................................................................38
4 ASIGNACIÓN DEL ERROR INTERNO 999..................................................................................................................................39
11.6 DATOS TÉCNICOS.......................................................................................................................................................................45
50
CONFIGURACIÓN DE LA CURVA DEL QUEMADOR
Página Inicial Home: mantener apagado el termostato. El quemador

se queda en modalidad espera.
Desbloquear el controlador: presionar ENVÍO.
Informaciones
Manual
Configuración
Presionar la tecla derecha para posicionarse sobre el icono

configuración (dibujada con llave inglesa y martillo).
Presionar ENVÍO
51
Presionar ENVÍO de nuevo
Mantener la contraseña "0000" y confirmar con ENVÍO.
Nueva página, nivel 1 desbloqueado.
Presionar con la tecla derecha suscrito sobre EDITAR.
Presionar ENVÍO.
52
Posición del aire y del gas durante el encendido del quemador

1) posición de encendido,
2) posición servomotor del gas (número),
3) posición servomotor del aire (número), 2 3
LOS VALORES VARÍAN DE QUEMADOR EN QUEMADOR

! 1
Activar el termostato. Se acciona el quemador.
Pre-purgar.
El controlador lleva los servomotores a la posición de encendido y

acciona el transformador de encendido.
Si el quemador se acciona con estos ajustes, aparecerá esta página.

Si el quemador no se acciona con estos ajustes, véase página 7.
53
CONFIGURACIÓN DEL PUNTO DE ENCENDIDO CON EL QUEMADOR EN STAND-BY
Si hay problemas, el quemador pasará a la modalidad de bloqueo

y la razón será indicada en la pantalla.
Controlar el código de bloqueo y presionar ENVÍO para desbloquear.
Presionar ENVÍO para modificar las posiciones (quemador en

modalidad espera).
Presionar "arriba" para aumentar la posición de abertura del gas o

"abajo" para disminuirla.
Presionar la tecla derecha para moverse de la regulación del

servomotor del gas a la regulación del servomotor del aire.
54
Presionar "arriba" para aumentar la posición de abertura del aire o

Presionar ENVÍO para memorizar la nueva configuración.
CONFIGURACIÓN CON EL QUEMADOR ENCENDIDO
Controlar la calidad de la combustión (con un analizador de humo).

Para modificar las válvulas de combustión y regular la posición de
los servomotores (gas y aire), presionar ENVÍO.
Presionar "arriba" para aumentar la posición de abertura del gas o

Presionar la tecla derecha para desplazarse de la regulación del

servomotor del gas a la regulación del servomotor del aire.
55
Presionar "arriba" para aumentar la posición de abertura del aire

o "abajo" para disminuirla.
Presionar ENVÍO para memorizar la nueva configuración.
Presionar "arriba" para dejar la posición de encendido.
Controlar la calidad de la combustión en todas las posiciones

(desde la salida mínima hasta la máxima) y regular la
configuración del gas y del aire si necesario (como está indicado
en la página 5).
Configurar la posición de estanqueidad máxima (999), según la

salida máxima necesaria del calentador. Si necesario, configurar la
presión del gas de entrada (en la salida del reductor de la presión
del gas). Controlar de nuevo la calidad de la combustión en todas las
posiciones y regular el gas y el aire si necesario (véase página 5).
Presionar EXIT para memorizar los ajustes de la combustión.

56
Presionar EXIT de nuevo para dejar el menú principal.
Presionar EXIT de nuevo para dejar la configuración.
Los quemadores funcionan en modalidad automática.
Si hay problemas, el quemador pasará a la modalidad de bloqueo

y la razón será indicada en la pantalla.
Controlar el código de bloqueo y presionar ENVÍO para desbloquear.
Si la configuración de encendido no es correcta (por ejemplo, hay

demasiado aire). el quemador no puede accionarse. En este caso,
regular otra vez el punto de encendido (véase página 3), si no,
comprobar que no haya otra razón que cause la interrupción del
encendido.
57
CONFIGURACIÓN DE UNA NUEVA

CURVA CON INVÉRTER
Con invérter modificar los puntos de la curva solamente con
! el quemador encendido.
• Con quemador en STAND-BY pulsar enter
• Con las flechas
• ir al icono
• pulsar enter
• Con las flechas
• ir al icono
• pulsar enter
• verificar la contraseña 0000
• pulsar enter para confirmar

58
• Con las flechas
• ir al icono
• pulsar enter
• pulsar enter para eliminar la curva
• pulsar enter para confirmar el eliminado de la curva
• ahora la curva de trabajo está eliminada
• pulsar enter
• pulsar exit
59
• Con las flechas
• ir al icono
• pulsar enter
• Cerrar la línea termostática
• el quemador va a prelavado
• el quemador se pone en el punto de encendido
• esperar a que los servomotores del aire / gas de pongan a 0

grados
• el invérter se pone a 30 Hz
• pulsar enter
60
• pulsar enter y programar el punto de encendido con las
flechas
• programar los valores y pulsar enter

Los valores indicados son los aconsejador.
i
• pulsar enter para confirmar el punto de encendido

• el quemador efectuará la descarga y abrirá las válvulas
• con el quemador encendido verificar la combustión con el

analizador de combustión
• modificar utilizando las flechas
• pulsar enter para memorizarlo
• pulsar para desplazarse sobre la carga 200 (mínimo

quemador)
• pulsar enter
61
• pulsar para programar la potencia mínima del quemador
• pulsar para desplazarse sobre la carga máxima 999
• pulsar enter
• pulsar para programar la potencia máxima del que-

mador
• verificare la combustión en todos los puntos de la curva (800-

700-600-500-400-300-250) como en los puntos anteriores
• una vez terminada la regulación pulsar tres veces

62
5 DISPOSITIVO DE MANDO Y PANTALLAS

5.1 INTERFAZ DEL USUARIO UI300 5.2 MENÚ FUNCIONES T
El menú se divide en tres recorridos:
1 2 3 4 INFORMACIONES
MANUAL
CONFIGURACIÓN
INFORMACIONES
Seleccionar el recorrido INFORMACIONES para obtener

Pantalla 1 Pantalla informaciones sobre:
La pantalla muestra los siguientes • el quemador
2 Tecla retroceso
iconos:
3 Teclas cursor • los errores que han ocurrido
• la estructura del menú
• la versión del software
• el estado operativo 4 Tecla envío
• la pantalla de la suma de control
• los parámetros
• el número de serie
• los mensajes de error
• las posiciones de los mandos de accionamiento (posición
corriente del registro para cada canal)
• las entradas/salidas digitales
La tecla retroceso
La tecla "volver a la ventana antecedente".
Las teclas cursor MANUAL

Seleccionar el recorrido MANUAL para
Se puede navegar en el menú utilizando las teclas cursor. • accionar y parar manualmente el quemador
Se pueden utilizar las teclas "izquierda" y "derecha" para • regular el nivel de combustión interna del quemador
moverse paso a paso hacia la fila seleccionada. Al final de
la fila seleccionada, el cursor pasa a la fila inferior siguiente,
si es posible. Si el menú tiene más filas, se pueden utilizar
las teclas "arriba" y "abajo" para cambiar de fila. Para
visualizar los parámetros, se puede pasar entre los campos CONFIGURACIÓN
individuales. Seleccionar el recorrido CONFIGURACIÓN para obtener
informaciones sobre y programar:
• la contraseña
Tecla ENVÍO
• los ajustes del quemador (pantallas y ajustes)
Presionar ENVÍO para volver a la pantalla inicial del menú. • los ajustes del actuador (pantalla)
Se puede abrir el submenú seleccionado de la ventana del • el sistema de control aire/combustible
menú. Presionando la tecla envío, se pueden transferir los
• la curva "borrar"
valores de configuración de una ventana de un parámetro.
• los ajustes de la pantalla
63
5.3 MENÚ PRINCIPAL 5.4.1 DETALLES DEL QUEMADOR

Pantallas de las horas de trabajo
• Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar el menú
y confirmarlo con Envío .La pantalla muestra la

ventana "Informaciones del sistema".
Fig. 5-2 Pantalla "Menú principal"

1 Recorrido INFORMACIONES [seleccionado]
2 Pantalla del combustible utilizado
3 Gráfico de barras del nivel de combustión interna en % (0 - 100)
4 Recorrido MANUAL Fig. 5-4 Pantalla "Informaciones del sistema"
5 Nivel de acceso 2 1 Para visualizar la pantalla de las horas de trabajo [seleccionado]
6 Recorrido CONFIGURACIÓN 2 Número de arranques del quemador
7 Número de ventana
• Utilizar las teclas para seleccionar el menú
1.Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar un menú y
y confirmar con Envío .
confirmarlo con Envío La pantalla muestra la ventana del menú "Pantalla de las horas
de trabajo".
5.4 RECORRIDO DE LAS INFORMACIONES

1.Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar el recorrido
y confirmarlo con Envío
Fig. 5-5 Pantalla "Horas de trabajo"

1 Icono de las horas de trabajo
2 Número total de las horas de trabajo (dispositivo conectado a
la tensión de la red)
3 Número de las horas de trabajo, funcionamiento con gasóleo
4 Número de las horas de trabajo, funcionamiento con gas
Fig. 5-3 Pantalla "Menú búsqueda"
Pantalla arranques del quemador
1 Información sobre el quemador seleccionado [seleccionado] • Utilizar las teclas en el menú Informaciones del sistema
2 Número de serie
para seleccionar el menú y confirmarlo con
3 Cronología del error
4 Configuración del valor real del nivel de combustión del actua-
dor (sólo pantalla)
5 Versión del software
6 Entradas/salidas digitales
7 Pantalla de la suma de control
64
4 Código diagnóstico 2
• Envío . 5 Número de las horas de trabajo en el momento en que ocurre
• La pantalla muestra la ventana del menú "Contador de arran- el error
ques".
La información acerca de los códigos de errores y
i diagnósticos se encuentra en el listado de los códigos de
errores. Para analizar un error, siempre hacen falta el código
del error y el código diagnóstico D1 o D2.
5.4.3 VERSIÓN DEL SOFTWARE

Pantalla de la versión del software
Fig. 5-6 Pantalla "Contador de arranques"
y confirmarlo con Envío .
1 Icono del arranque del quemador
La pantalla muestra el menú "Versión del software".
2 Número de los arranques del quemador, funcionamiento con
gasóleo
3 Número de los arranques del quemador, funcionamiento con
gas
5.4.2 VISUALIZACIÓN DE LA
CRONOLOGÍA DEL ERROR
Fig. 5-9 Menú versión del software
Pantalla de los errores del quemador 1 Icono de la versión del software
• Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar el menú 2 Versión del software UI300 (interfaz del usuario)
3 Versión del software BT300 (BurnerTronic)
La pantalla muestra el menú "Selección de la cronología del error".
5.4.4 PANTALLA DE LA SUMA DE CONTROL
Pantalla de la suma de control

La pantalla muestra el menú "Suma de control CRC16".
Fig. 5-7 Menú de selección de la cronología del error
1 Icono del error del quemador [seleccionado]
• Utilizar las teclas para seleccionar el menú y
confirmar con Envío .

La pantalla muestra el menú "Selección de la cronología del error".
Fig. 5-10 Menú de la suma de control CRC16
1 Icono de la suma de control
2 Suma de control, nivel de acceso 0
Fig. 5-8 Menú de selección de la cronología del error 5 Suma de control, nivel de acceso 4
1 Icono del error código-pantalla Suma de control CRC16
2 Código del error (el sistema almacena los 10 últimos errores y La suma de control está formada por los parámetros del dispositivo.
el n. 1 es el error más reciente) En todo caso, el BT300 calcula una suma de control para los
parámetros de los niveles de acceso 0, 1, 2 y 4. La suma de control
3 Código diagnóstico 1 se visualiza como valor hexadecimal. La suma de control se utiliza
65
para determinar si el valor de uno o más parámetros en los niveles

de acceso correspondientes ha sido cambiado. • Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar el menú
5.4.5 NÚMERO DE SERIE y confirmarlo con Envío .

La pantalla muestra el menú "entradas/salidas digitales".
Pantalla número de serie 1 2

La pantalla muestra el menú "Número de serie".
Fig. 5-13 Menú entradas y salidas digitales

1 Icono de las entradas digitales [seleccionado]
2 Icono de las salidas digitales
• Seleccionar el menú y confirmarlo con Envío .

Fig. 5-11 Menú del número de serie
1 Icono del número de serie La pantalla muestra "Página 1 de las entradas":
2 Número de serie del interfaz del usuario

3 Número de serie BurnerTronic
5.4.6 POSICIONES DE LOS ACTUADORES

Pantalla de las posiciones de los actuadores
Fig. 5-14 Página 1 del menú de las entradas
• Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar el menú 1 Icono de las entradas digitales
y confirmarlo con Envío . 2 Página siguiente

La pantalla muestra el menú "Actuadores". 3 Selección del combustible: gasóleo [no]
4 Selección del combustible: gas [sí]
5 Arranque del quemador [sí] - terminal X10
Las señales en los puntos 3 y 4 en la Fig. 5-14 en la página
i 1 del menú de las entradas son "lógicas" y no "físicas".
Premisa: algunas señales pueden tener más de una fuente
(terminal, LSB, buses de campo, parámetros).
Visualización de la segunda página de las entradas
Fig. 5-12 Menú Actuadores
1 Icono de los Actuadores • Utilizar las teclas cursor para pasar a la página siguiente
2 Actuador canal 1 (gasóleo) y confirmar con Envío .
3 Actuador canal 2 (aire) La pantalla muestra "Página 2 de las entradas":
4 Actuador canal 3 (gasóleo)
5 Canal opcional OFF; control del convertidor de frecuencia
6 Posición efectiva del actuador
El número del canal depende de la configuración.
i
5.4.7 CONTROL DE LAS ENTRADAS/ Fig. 5-15 Página 2 del menú de las entradas
SALIDAS DIGITALES 1 Icono de las entradas digitales
Control de las entradas digitales 2 Página siguiente
66
3 Presión mín. del gasóleo presente [no] - terminal X05 4 Escape incorrecto [sí] - terminal X10
4 Presión mín. del gas presente [no] - terminal X05
5 Presión mín. del aire presente [no] - terminal X05 5.4.8 SALIDAS DIGITALES
Control de las salidas digitales
Visualización de la tercera página de las entradas • Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar el menú
• Utilizar las teclas cursor para pasar a la página siguiente y confirmarlo con Envío .
La pantalla muestra el menú "Página 1 de las salidas digitales".
La pantalla muestra "Página 3 de las entradas":
Fig. 5-18 Página 1 del menú de las salidas digitales

1 Icono de las salidas digitales
Fig. 5-16 Página 3 del menú de las entradas
1 Icono de las entradas digitales 2 Página siguiente
2 Página antecedente 3 Ventilador [on] - terminal X25
3 Página siguiente 4 Error [off] - terminal X24 (regulable P 809)
4 Cadena de interbloqueo de seguridad gasóleo cerrado [no] - 5 Transformador de encendido [off] - terminal X04
terminal X06 Visualización de la segunda página de salidas
5 Cadena de interbloqueo de seguridad gas cerrado [no]
• Utilizar las teclas cursor para pasar a la página siguiente
6 Cadena de interbloqueo de seguridad calentador cerrado [no]
Las señales en los puntos 4 y 5 en la Fig. 5-15 en la página 2 y confirmar con Envío .
i del menú entradas son "lógicas" y no "físicas". El BT320/330 La pantalla muestra el menú "Página 2 de salidas digitales".
suporta el funcionamiento con gasóleo o con gas, pero no
puede ser cambiado. No hay señales para la cadena de
interbloqueo de seguridad gasóleo o gas. La señal sobre el
terminal X06 es conocida como "cadena de interbloqueo de
seguridad del quemador".
Visualización de la cuarta página de las entradas
• Utilizar las teclas cursor para pasar a la página siguiente Fig. 5-19 Página 2 del menú de las salidas digitales
y confirmar con Envío . 1 Icono de las salidas digitales

La pantalla muestra "Página 4 de las entradas": 2 Página antecedente
3 Página siguiente
4 Válvula del gasóleo 1 [on] - terminal X01
5 Válvula del gasóleo 2 [off] - terminal X02
6 Válvula del gasóleo 3 [off] - terminal X03
Fig. 5-17 Página 4 del menú de las entradas Visualización de la tercera página de las salidas
1 Icono de las entradas digitales • Utilizar las teclas cursor para pasar a la página siguiente
2 Página antecedente
3 Señal de llama presente [no] - terminal X21
67
5 RECORRIDO MANUAL
MANUAL
Seleccionar el recorrido MANUAL para llevar a cabo las siguientes

acciones:
1 encender y apagar el quemador
Fig. 5-20 Página 3 del menú de las salidas digitales 2 preconfigurar la estanqueidad del quemador
1 Icono de las salidas digitales Pantalla recorrido MANUAL
2 Página antecedente
• Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar el recorrido
3 Página siguiente
4 Válvula de encendido [on] - terminal X03 y confirmarlo con Envío .
5 Válvula del gas 1 [off] - terminal X01 La pantalla muestra el recorrido "Manual".
6 Válvula del gas 2 [off] - terminal X02
Visualización de la cuarta página de las salidas
• Utilizar las teclas cursor para pasar a la página siguiente
y confirmar con Envío . Fig. 5-22 Recorrido Manual

1 Icono Manual
2 Accionar el quemador manualmente [off]
3 Regular la estanqueidad del quemador
4 Icono de la confirmación de la configuración
El loop de control "Burner ON" no necesita ser encendido de este
menú para que el quemador se accione. La interfaz del usuario toma
Fig. 5-21 Página 4 del menú de las salidas digitales el control en este menú. Si no hay contacto con la señal "Burner ON"
de otras fuentes (terminal X10.2), el software apaga el quemador
1 Icono de las salidas digitales cuando el usuario sale del menú.
2 Página antecedente Si el quemador se enciende por medio de la pantalla, el
! BT300 ya no reacciona a la señal de entrada "Burner ON"
3 Bomba del gasóleo 3 [off] - terminal X26 en el conectador X10.2. Por eso los limitadores, las pantallas
4 Selección del gasóleo [off] - terminal X24 (regulable con P 809) y otras funciones de seguridad parecidas no pueden ser
utilizados con esta entrada.
5 Selección del gas [off] - terminal X24 (regulable con P 809)
Dejando esta ventana, el quemador ya no funciona.
i
Regular la estanqueidad del quemador
• Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar la regula-
ción del nivel de combustión del quemador en % y confirmar la
selección con Envío .

• Cambiar la estanqueidad del quemador con las teclas cursor
y confirmarla con Envío .

Se puede regular la estanqueidad del quemador sólo si el
i quemador está funcionando. Accionar el quemador antes de
regular la estanqueidad como dicho antes.
68
5.6 RECORRIDO DE LA CONFIGURACIÓN Configurar la secuencia del programa

Pantalla recorrido de la CONFIGURACIÓN • Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar el menú
y confirmarlo con Envío . La pantalla muestra la pantalla "secuencia del programa".
La pantalla muestra la "búsqueda del menú".
Fig. 5-25 Pantalla de la secuencia del programa

Fig. 5-23 Menú búsqueda 1 Duración de la pre-ventilación [seleccionado]
1 Icono de la contraseña (seleccionado) 2 Quemador piloto con funcionamiento con gasóleo
2 Borrar las curvas 3 Duración de la post-ventilación
3 Pantalla ajustes del programa 4 Prueba de estanqueidad de las válvulas
4 Ajustes del controlador del nivel de combustión 5 Quemador piloto con funcionamiento con gas
5 Lectura de los ajustes del nivel de combustión del actuador
Programar la post-ventilación
6 Ajustes de la contraseña
7 Ajustes de la curva
8 Ajustes de la pantalla y confirmarlo con Envío .
La pantalla muestra el menú "duración de la pre-ventilación".
5.6.1INSERIR LA CONTRASEÑA 1 2 3
Pantalla del menú "Ajustes de la contraseña"


La pantalla muestra el menú "Ajustes de la contraseña".
Fig. 5-26 Menú Duración de la pre-ventilación

1 Icono Duración de la pre-ventilación
2 Programar la duración de la pre-ventilación
3 Aceptar el valor presionando ENVÍO
Fig. 5-24 Menú Inserir contraseña • Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar el número
que se desea cambiar.
1 Icono de la contraseña (seleccionado)
• Cambiar el valor del número con las teclas cursor .
2 Inserir la contraseña
3 Nivel de acceso 2 visualizado con autorización del acceso • Confirmar con Envío .
Empieza la cuenta atrás.
• Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar el campo
de la contraseña que se desea cambiar.
• Cambiar el número con las teclas cursor .
• Confirmar la contraseña con Envío .

5.6.2 SECUENCIA DEL PROGRAMA
69
Si los dos valores son equivalentes, el valor puede ser

! aceptado presionando ENVÍO. Si hay diferencias entre los
valores, terminar el proceso de "aceptación".
b) Rechazar el cambio hecho al parámetro. Seleccionar la tecla
retroceso .El cambio hecho al parámetros no está acep-

tado. Aparece la siguiente página :
Fig. 5-27 Transferencia segura de los datos
1 Icono UI300
2 Icono BT300
3 Borrar (retroceso)
4 Número de parámetro UI300
6 Transferir presionando ENVÍO (parpadeante)
Fig. 5-29 Pantalla de la transferencia incorrecta de los datos
7 Valor UI300
1 Icono UI300
8 Valor BT300
2 Icono BT300
No aceptar el valor hasta que los valores UI300 y BT300 son
i iguales. El valor para el parámetro tiene que ser confirmado
presionando ENVÍO en el espacio de la cuenta atrás (8 s.). 4 Número de parámetro BT300
• Aceptar o rechazar la entrada 5 Icono aplicar parámetros
La siguiente secuencia de eventos para confirmar o rechazar
i la entrada es exactamente la misma para todas las entradas
6 Valor BT300
de los parámetros. De hecho, este proceso ya no se 7 Valor UI300

mostrará en detalle en las siguientes explicaciones para la Programar la duración de la post-ventilación
configuración de los parámetros.
Simplemente aparecerá el siguiente texto: "Aceptar o rechazar la
entrada" y confirmarlo con Envío .
La pantalla muestra el menú "duración de la post-ventilación".
a) Confirmar la entrada en tiempo presionando Envío .
El valor está aceptado. La pantalla muestra la siguiente página:
1 Icono de la Duración de la pre-ventilación

2 Programar la duración de la post-ventilación
Fig. 5-28 Pantalla después de la transferencia correcta de los datos 3 Aceptar los ajustes presionando ENVÍO
1 Icono UI300
• Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar el número
2 Icono BT300 que se desea cambiar.
3 Número de parámetro UI300 • Cambiar el valor del número con las teclas cursor .
4 Número de parámetro BT300
5 Icono rechazar parámetros • Confirmar con Envío .
6 Valor BT300
"Aceptar o rechazar la entrada"
7 Valor UI300 Funciones de la prueba de estanqueidad.
Se transfiere el cambio del parámetro al sistema de control del • Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar el menú
quemador.
70
• y confirmarlo con Envío . y confirmarlo con Envío .

La pantalla muestra el menú "prueba de estanqueidad de las • Cambiar el estado funcional ON/OFF utilizando las teclas cursor
válvulas".
y confirmar presionando Envío .
La pantalla muestra el menú de la prueba de estanqueidad de las
válvulas después de la extinción de la llama.
Fig. 5-30 Submenú "Estanqueidad del sistema de control"

1 Prueba de estanqueidad ON/OFF
2 Prueba de estanqueidad antes del encendido
Fig. 5-32 Menú de la prueba de estanqueidad de las válvulas
3 Prueba de estanqueidad después del encendido después de la extinción de la llama
4 Duración de la prueba de estanqueidad 51 Icono de la prueba de estanqueidad de las válvulas después de
la extinción de la llama
Hace falta el nivel de acceso 2 para programar esta función.
i 2 Pantalla de la prueba de estanqueidad de las válvulas
"Aceptar o rechazar la entrada". 3 Aceptar la configuración presionando Envío
Accionar la prueba de estanqueidad de las válvulas antes del La prueba de estanqueidad de las válvulas está programada.
encendido Hace falta el nivel de acceso 2 para programar esta función.
i
"Aceptar o rechazar la entrada".
y confirmarlo con Envío . Duración de la prueba de estanqueidad de las válvulas
• Cambiar el estado funcional ON/OFF utilizando las teclas cursor
La pantalla muestra el menú prueba de estanqueidad de las válvulas
antes del encendido. La pantalla muestra el menú "duración de la prueba de estanqueidad
de las válvulas".
Fig. 5-31 Menú de la prueba de estanqueidad de las válvulas antes

del encendido Fig. 5-33 Pantalla de la prueba de estanqueidad de las válvulas
1 Menú de la prueba de estanqueidad de las válvulas después del 1 Icono de la duración de la prueba de estanqueidad de las
encendido válvulas
2 Pantalla de la prueba de estanqueidad de las válvulas (activo) 2 Programar la duración de la prueba de estanqueidad de las
3 Aceptar la configuración presionando Envío válvulas
La prueba de estanqueidad de las válvulas está programada. 3 Aceptar la configuración presionando Envío
i Hace falta el nivel de acceso 2 para programar esta • Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar el número
función. que se desea cambiar.
• Cambiar el valor del número con las teclas cursor .

Controlar la prueba de estanqueidad de las válvulas después de
la extinción de la llama • Confirmar con Envío .
Accionar el quemador piloto en funcionamiento con gas
71
La pantalla muestra el menú de la estanqueidad del actuador.



La pantalla muestra el menú "quemador piloto con funcionamiento
con gas" Fig. 5-36 Página 1 del menú de la estanqueidad del actuador
1 Icono de las posiciones de los actuadores
2 Pantalla canal 1, gasóleo
3 Pantalla canal 2, aire
4 Pantalla canal 3, off
5 Canal opcional, off
Fig. 5-34 Menú del quemador piloto con funcionamiento con gas Configuración de la curva de los actuadores
1 Icono del quemador piloto con funcionamiento con gas • Utilizar las teclas cursor para seleccionar el menú
2 Accionar el quemador piloto con funcionamiento con gas
3 Aceptar la configuración presionando Envío.
Si se sigue presionando la tecla para más de 2
Hace falta el nivel de acceso 2 para programar esta función. i segundos en el menú "Ajustes de la curva de los actuadores",
i se causará un bloqueo anormal.
"Aceptar o rechazar la entrada". La pantalla muestra el menú de los ajustes de la curva.
Programar el quemador piloto con funcionamiento con gasóleo


La pantalla muestra el menú "quemador piloto con funcionamiento Fig. 5-37 Menú de los ajustes de la curva
con gasóleo"
1 Posición de encendido del punto de combustión
2 Valor de ajuste del canal 1, gasóleo
3 Valor real del canal 1, gasóleo
4 Valor de ajuste del canal 2, aire
5 Valor real del canal 2, aire
6 Valor de ajuste del canal 3, gasóleo
Fig. 5-35 Menú del quemador piloto con funcionamiento con gasóleo
1 Icono del quemador piloto con funcionamiento con gasóleo 7 Valor real del canal 3, gasóleo
2 Accionar el quemador piloto con funcionamiento con gasóleo 8 Los datos de la curva para este punto de combustión ya existen
3 Aceptar la configuración presionando Envío • Utilizar las teclas cursor para programar el punto de
Hace falta el nivel de acceso 2 para programar esta función.
i combustión y confirmarlo con Envío El valor de ajuste
del canal 1 está seleccionado (visualizado al revés).
• Utilizar las teclas cursor para programar la posición
Configuración de la estanqueidad del actuador
del actuador del canal.

72
Se puede seleccionar otro punto de estanqueidad.

• Utilizar las teclas cursor para pasar al canal siguiente.
Si se presiona la tecla mientras se cambia el punto
del actuador en el punto de combustión seleccionado.
i de combustión, el cambio no es aceptado.
• Configurar la posición del canal del actuador en el punto de
combustión deseado a través de la tecla cursor.
Los actuadores vuelven a la posición programada
i inmediatamente después de la regulación.
El motor del ventilador tiene que funcionar para reglar el canal 4.
La pantalla pasa al menú de selección del nivel de combustión.
• Utilizar la tecla para pasar al menú de configuración,

después de haber configurado la curva.
Están disponibles los siguientes puntos de combustión:
i Puntos de encendido , 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600,
700, 800, 900, 999
• Configurar los puntos de combustión deseados como descrito
arriba y confirmarlos con Envío .

Fig. 5-39 Funcionamiento en tres niveles
Si se sigue presionando la tecla para más de 2
i Durante el funcionamiento multi nivel, están disponibles los
segundos en el menú "Configuración de la curva de los
actuadores", se causará un bloqueo anormal.
i siguientes puntos:
Configurar el funcionamiento multi nivel con gasóleo - primer Punto de encendido ,

nivel 1 (primer nivel),
1 → 2 (punto de encendido de la válvula, segundo nivel),
1 → 2 (punto de apagamiento de la válvula, segundo nivel),
2 (segundo nivel),
2 → 3 (punto de encendido de la válvula, tercer nivel),
2 → 3 (punto de apagamiento, tercer nivel), 
Fig. 5-38 Menú del funcionamiento multi nivel 3 (tercer nivel),
1 Pantalla primer nivel Programar el funcionamiento con gasóleo en niveles -

transición del primer nivel al segundo
2 Valor de ajuste, posición de la válvula del aire
• Seleccionar el primer nivel y confirmarlo con Envío .

Los actuadores pasan a estas posiciones.
La posición del valor de ajuste para la prime-
ra unidad activada está visualizado al revés.
Fig. 5-40 Transición del primer nivel al segundo
1 Pantalla del punto de encendido de la válvula, segundo nivel
del actuador seleccionado.
• Utilizar las teclas cursor para pasar a la unidad
siguiente. 3 Valor de ajuste, posición de la válvula del aire
• Seleccionar el valor de ajuste para la posición de la válvula
• Seleccionar Envío .
Las posiciones de todos los actuadores del nivel seleccionado del aire y confirmarlo con Envío .
están almacenadas. Los mandos de accionamiento pasan a esta posición.
73
• La posición del valor de ajuste para el actua-

dor activo está visualizada al revés.

del actuador seleccionado.
• Utilizar las teclas cursor para pasar a la unidad

siguiente.
Fig. 5-43 Menú de los valores borrados
• Seleccionar Envío . 1 Valores borrados
Las posiciones de todos los actuadores del nivel seleccionado
están almacenadas. Ajustes de la pantalla UI300
Se puede seleccionar otro punto de combustión.
Programar otros niveles de combustión utilizando el mismo
i proceso.
Borrar las curvas de combustión

• En el recorrido "Configuración", utilizar las teclas cursor
para seleccionar el menú y confirmar presio- Fig. 5-44 Pantalla del Recorrido Configuración
1 Icono UI300
nando Envío . 2 Luminosidad
La pantalla muestra el menú "Borrar las curvas".
3 Contraste
4 Tiempo de espera para el protector de pantalla
No se puede inserir un valor "0" para el protector de pantalla.
i
5.6.3 OTRAS PANTALLAS
No hay conexión entre UI300 y BT300
Fig. 5-41 Menú borrar curvas
1 Icono Borrar curvas
2 Borrar curvas seleccionado
3 Confirmar la cancelación de las curvas
La pantalla muestra el "indicador de confirmación".
Fig. 5-45 Ninguna conexión

1 Icono de la interfaz del usuario UI300
2 Símbolo para ninguna conexión
3 Controlador del quemador BT300
Pantalla que aparece por ejemplo cuando se utiliza el software
remoto LSB y la comunicación entre BT300 y UI300 no está
Fig. 5-42 Indicador de confirmación del menú borrar curvas momentáneamente disponible.
1 Menú antecedente
Terminación
2 Borrar los valores [seleccionado]
3 Seguir en la cancelación de las curvas
Seleccionar Envío
Los valores de las curvas están borrados.
La pantalla muestra el menú "valores borrados".
Fig. 5-46 Terminación

1 Icono error de comunicación - ninguna conexión disponible
74
8 PRUEBA DE ESTANQUEIDAD DE LAS

VÁLVULAS PRINCIPALES DE GAS
Fig. 8-1 Diagrama del proceso de la prueba de estanqueidad
75
8.3 EXTINCIÓN DE LA RED DE

PRUEBA EN EL TECHO
i Considerar el diámetro de la red del gas en la ventilación
del techo. Para la ventilación, se activa la tapa X02 para 3
segundos. Comprobar que este tiempo sea suficiente también
para el diámetro de la red de ventilación más pequeña.
Ventilación de techo
de la red al
de gas quemador
Fig. 8-2 Proposición de cables para la ventilación de la red del gas

a través del techo en combinación con BurnerTronic
76
11 APÉNDICE
11.1 PANORÁMICA DEL SISTEMA
Fig. 11-1 Panorámica del sistema de BurnerTronic BT300

77
11.2 GRÁFICOS DE LA SECUENCIA DEL PROCESO
Tecla para los gráficos de la secuencia del proceso

Cualquier condición
t1 Esperar la cadena de interbloqueo de cualquiera
seguridad del gas, pantalla presión del
aire min. scan
t2 Tiempo para la presión en la red de 2s
prueba del gas (sólo con la prueba de
estanqueidad activada)
t3 Tiempo del servo motor 30s - 60s
t5 Duración de la pre-ventilación regulable
t6 Tiempo de pre-encendido regulable
t7 Tiempo de la primera seguridad 3s gas / 5s
gasóleo
t8 Tiempo de estabilización regulable
t9 Tiempo de la segunda seguridad 3s gas / 5s
gasóleo
t10 Fase de funcionamiento cualquiera
t11 Modalidad de control cualquiera
t12 Tiempo de reducción de la presión en la 3s
red de prueba del gas
t13 Duración de la post-ventilación regulable
t14 Elementos de control al cargo de base
t15 Tiempo post-encendido regulable
t16 Control de extinción de la llama 5s
t17 Prueba de estanqueidad, válvula de 30s
gas 2
Fig. 11-2 Gasóleo con quemador piloto BT300

78
Fig. 11-3 Gasóleo sin quemador piloto BT300
Fig. 11-4 Gas con quemador piloto y prueba de estanqueidad BT300
Fig. 11-5 Gas sin quemador piloto y prueba de estanqueidad BT300

79
Fig. 11-6 Prueba de estanqueidad BT300
t1 Duración de la ventilación, 2 segundos

t1 Tiempo de retraso, 2 segundos
t3 Duración de la prueba de estanqueidad, regulable
t4 Tiempo de llenado, regulable
La señal está presente
La señal puede estar presente
La señal no puede estar presente
80
11.3 DIAGRAMAS DE CONEXIÓN
X30 Interfaz del usuario UI 300 Longitud máxima del cable:

X31 Opción LSB X01-X10: 10m
X20-X21: 3m
X32 salida continúa 1, por ejemplo válvula del aire
X22-X23: ilimitada
X32 salida continúa 2, por ejemplo válvula del aire
X24-X26: 10m
X34 salida continúa 3 (opcional) X30: 1m
(1) SIC = cadena de interbloqueo de seguridad X31: 1m
(2) 230V CA 47 - protección del fusible exterior 63Hz necesaria X32-X34: 3m
(máx 10A)
(3) 230V CA para alimentación eléctrica a dispositivos exteriores
81
11.3.2 CONEXIONES OPCIONALES

PARA EL ESCÁNER DE LLAMA
Fig. 11-10 Conexión con electrodo de ionización de conexión
Fig. 11-11 Conexión de la foto resistencia Siemens QRB...
Fig. 11-12 Conexión de los sensores KLC1000, KLC2002
Fig. 11-13 Conexión F200K
Código del color

BK negro
BN marrón
BU azul
82
11.3.3 INTEGRACIÓN DEL MÓDULO LSB
Fig. 11-15 Conexiones del módulo LSB a BT300

83
2 LISTADO DE LOS CÓDIGOS DE LOS ERRORES

Código D1 D2 Descripción
del error
0 Error desconocido (error interno)
1 La señal de la preventilación queda activa.
2 Luz parásita detectada
3 Extinción de la llama durante el encendido
4 Extinción de la llama durante el funcionamiento
5 La señal de la llama no aparece durante el tiempo de la primera
seguridad
6 La señal de la llama se apaga durante el tiempo de la estabilización
7 La señal de la llama se apaga durante el tiempo de la primera
seguridad
8 La señal de la llama se apaga durante el tiempo de la segunda
seguridad
9 La señal de la llama no aparece durante el tiempo de seguridad
10 La señal de la llama se apaga durante el tiempo de seguridad
11 El control de la luz parásita no queda activo durante los 5
segundos necesarios
13 La llama principal aparece durante el encendido
103 Los datos vanos no son válidos
105 Los datos de la curva no son válidos o no están disponibles. Curva programada / número
del combustible
106 Los parámetros entre los dos reguladores no son coherentes. Número del parámetro
Posibles causas del error: Se ha cargado una serie de datos
normal (no protegida) y ha ocurrido un error durante la trasferencia
de estos datos. La serie de datos no se ha transferido de manera
correcta.
107 La configuración no es válida (ver capítulo 3 : Asignación del error
de configuración 107)
120 Modalidades de funcionamiento diferentes en los dos reguladores
121 La corrección está fuera banda Canal (x)
141 La reacción del canal cambia demasiado rápido Canal (x)
151 La válvula de recirculación está desactivada Canal (x)
170 Cortocircuito del detector de la llama LDR
191 La primera banda de control supera el tiempo de acción necesario Canal (x)
201 La primera banda de control tarda en remediar a un error Canal (x)
211 La segunda banda de control supera el tiempo de acción necesario Canal (x)
221 La segunda banda de control tarda en remediar a un error Canal (x)
231 El control de la relación combustible/aire está bloqueado Canal (x)
241 El actuador no se mueve y no se conoce la posición Canal 0 = atrás, 1 = adelante
251 El actuador no ha conseguido encontrar la posición de referencia Canal
261 El actuador se desplaza hacia una posición inválida (diferencia Canal
importante con respecto a su posición de destino)
271 La posición del actuador cambia demasiado rápido, resbalamiento Canal
281 La respuesta del actuador es incorrecta Canal
320 Cable roto abierto en la entrada del encendido
321 Cable roto abierto en el canal de reacción Canal (x)
351 Cambio inválido del combustible durante el funcionamiento del
quemador
352 Combinación inválida de las señales del combustible (no hay
señales)
353 Combinación inválida de las señales del combustible (muchas
señales)
362 Parada anormal debida a una falta de mantenimiento del
quemador
363 El valor de O2 válido mínimo ha sido superado
371 La salida para en encendido interno es defectuosa
372 La diferencia de los valores de encendido del quemador entre el
procesador principal y el regulador de vigilancia es demasiado
grande
84
del error
381 La desviación entre el procesador principal y el regulador de Canal de corrección
vigilancia es demasiado grande
391 La curva programada ha sido cambiada durante la programación
393 Parada de emergencia activada
394 La señal ON/OFF del quemador del interfaz del usuario se ha
apagado inesperadamente
451 En la modalidad de funcionamiento "encendido", no todos los Canal
canales están en la posición de encendido.
600 Tiempo del programa de control (FAT) superado
601 Error durante la prueba de estanqueidad: la presión del gas se
queda activa
602 Error durante la prueba de estanqueidad: no se ha detectado
ninguna presión del gas
603 ¡Se necesita ventilación manual de la línea del gas!
607 Error de reconocimiento de la posición de encendido
608 Error de la cadena de interbloqueo de seguridad del calentador
609 Error de la cadena de interbloqueo de seguridad del gas
610 Error de la cadena de interbloqueo de seguridad del gasóleo
611 Presión del gas demasiado baja
613 Falta de señal de la presión del aire
617 La llama piloto permanente se extingue durante el funcionamiento
624 Presión del gasóleo demasiado baja
711 Cambio de la modalidad de funcionamiento inválido Información acerca del
estado interno
713 Combinación de señales inválida en los bornes de entrada durante
la modalidad de funcionamiento "Quemador OFF"
la modalidad de funcionamiento "Quemador Listo"
la modalidad de funcionamiento "Preventilación"
la modalidad de funcionamiento "Posición del encendido"
la modalidad de funcionamiento "Encendido"
719 Las válvulas del combustible se quedan abiertas por demasiado
tiempo sin la llama
720 El transformador de encendido se queda activo por demasiado
tiempo
721 La válvula de encendido se queda abierta por demasiado tiempo
722 Las válvulas del combustible se abren en modalidad de
mantenimiento
723 El proceso de encendido necesita demasiado tiempo
724 Presión del gasóleo demasiado baja
725 Las válvulas del gasóleo se quedan abiertas cuando se selecciona
el gas
727 La válvula principal del gas 1 se abre inesperadamente
728 Las tres válvulas del gas se quedan abiertas por demasiado
tiempo
729 El proceso de encendido dura demasiado tiempo (sin el quemador
piloto)
730 Modalidad de mantenimiento sin el quemador piloto
731 La válvula de encendido se abre sin el quemador piloto
el funcionamiento
734 El período de preventilación está debajo del nivel mínimo
739 Prueba de estanqueidad: la válvula principal del gas 1 se queda
abierta por demasiado tiempo
740 Prueba de estanqueidad: la válvula principal del gas 1 tiene fugas
741 Prueba de estanqueidad: la válvula principal del gas 1 se queda
abierta por demasiado tiempo
85
del error
742 Prueba de estanqueidad: la válvula principal del gas 2 tiene fugas
743 Control de la llama: la llama quema por demasiado tiempo
después de la parada
745 Tiempo del programa de control superado
746 La electroválvula no puede ser apagada
747 Prueba de estanqueidad: no se puede efectuar la ventilación en
el quemador
751 La tarjeta bus se queda en espera
759 Deja la "modalidad de programación" automáticamente después
de 24 horas
760 No se puede cambiar de combustible durante la "modalidad de
programación"
763 Selección de una curva diferente en el procesador principal y en
el procesador de vigilancia
764 CO-regulador: error de la curva interna programada
800 Parámetro defectuoso Número del parámetro
801 El procesador principal y el procesador de vigilancia no tienen la Canal
misma modalidad de control del canal (error fatal, no se puede
efectuar un rearranque automático)
802 La integración de un canal en el control de la relación combustible/ Canal
aire tarda demasiado tiempo (se puede efectuar solamente un
rearranque automático)
803 El canal se queda cerrado por demasiado tiempo (error fatal, no Canal
se puede efectuar un rearranque automático)
804 La modalidad del canal del control de la relación combustible/aire Canal
no coincide con el tipo de control (error fatal, no se puede efectuar
un rearranque automático)
805 El canal controlado directamente se desplaza hacia una posición Canal + Fecha
inválida, como un canal que no ha sido desactivado o controlado
por el control de la relación combustible/aire
888 ¡El interbloqueo de los errores está activo! Número de referencia
889 La distancia entre los dos escapes remotos incorrectos es
demasiado corta
990 Fallo de corriente
921 El borne de salida para la válvula del gasóleo está defectuoso
922 El borne de salida para el transformador de encendido está
defectuoso
923 El borne de salida para la válvula del gas 1 está defectuoso
924 El borne de salida para la válvula del gas 2 está defectuoso
925 El borne de salida para el transformador de encendido está
defectuoso
928 El borne de salida para la bomba del gasóleo está defectuoso
929 Los bornes de salida para el ventilador están defectuosos
986 La prueba de margen dinámico detecta una reacción inválida Canal
987 El cambio durante el funcionamiento tarda demasiado tiempo
985 Causa posible de error para el error diagnóstico VSM:
BurnerTropic se espera un módulo VSM, pero el intercambio de
datos diagnósticos con el módulo no ha sido conseguido.
988 El relé de selección del combustible en el DFM está defectuoso
o no coincide con la reacción del DFM
989 La prueba de plausibilidad de la reacción del actuador en la curva
programada no ha sido conseguida.
990 Fallo de corriente
996 La escritura de parámetros seguros no ha podido ser terminada.
El dispositivo se ha bloqueado.
999 ¡Error interno! Ver capítulo 4 Asignación del error interno 999
86
3 ASIGNACIÓN DEL ERROR

DE CONFIGURACIÓN 107
D1 Descripción
1 Demasiados canales en el parámetro de configuración
804.
2 Ningún canal configurado.
3 Quemador de encendido permanente configurado
(parámetro 302, 303) pero no hay ningún dispositivo de
control de la llama de encendido (parámetro 800).
6 La supresión de la purga mediante una señal externa no
ha sido implementada.
7 Cambio de combustible via Off y postventilación ilimitada
configurados.
8 El tiempo de la purga es más breve que el tiempo mínimo
de la pre-purga.
9 Para los estadios de la modalidad de gasóleo.
13 El control de la llama australiana ha sido configurado,
pero no hay ningún dispositivo de control de la llama de
encendido.
18 El funcionamiento en modalidad de espera en BT300 no
está permitida.
19 Cambio inválido del combustible seleccionado.
20 BT300 sólo con punto de encendido separado.
21 "Encendido con ventilador", útil solamente con dispositivo
de gasóleo puro.
22 El funcionamiento por estadios útil solamente con
dispositivo de gasóleo puro.
23 El funcionamiento con 3 estadios funciona solamente sin
quemador de encendido.
24 Funcionamiento permanente no permitido (Featureflag).
25 El cambio del combustible no está permitido (Featureflag).
26 Demasiados canales (Featureflag).
27 Los quemadores de gasóleo con funcionamiento de
estadios necesitan de un canal del aire.
28 Una función inválida ha sido configurada para un canal
(Parámetro 400-404).
30 Muchos bornes configurados por una señal, configuración
del borne inválida.
31 No está disponible ningún borne de salida para el
ventilador o el transformador.
32 Las salidas necesarias para el funcionamiento con gasóleo
no están disponibles (bomba del gasóleo o válvula del
gasóleo).
33 Las salidas necesarias para el funcionamiento con gas no
están disponibles (válvula del gas).
34 Se necesita de un borne de salida para la válvula de
encendido, pero éste no está disponible en la configuración
del borne.
40 No está disponible ningún borne de entrada para el control
de la presión del aire.
41 No está disponible ningún borne de entrada para la cadena
de seguridad del gasóleo (la presión mínima del gasóleo
no será controlada directamente, porque está incluida en
la cadena de seguridad).
42 No está disponible ningún borne de entrada para la cadena
de seguridad del gas o para la presión mínima del gas.
43 La línea de reacción para la selección del combustible no
está mapada, pero es necesaria.
87
4 ASIGNACIÓN DEL ERROR INTERNO 999

0-1999: errores internos generados del interior del sistema API
D1 D2 Descripción
10 valor de retorno de m_PwrOn_ m_PwrOn_uiInitAPI() no conseguido
uiInitAPI()
20 0 Control de CRC32 del ROM no conseguido
21 0 Control cíclico de CRC32 del ROM durante el período del funcionamiento no
conseguido.
22 Estado de error La máquina de estado para el control de CRC32 durante el período de funcionamiento
ha entrado en un estado inválido
40 0 m_PwrOn_bLoadEEPROM() no conseguido
92 Directiva ATENCIÓN, número incorrecto en el módulo equivocado, señalado por hchactab si
las tablas de mando no son correctas
200 0 El último elemento destinatario no es miembro de sER.sP
201 0 El último elemento destinatario no es miembro de sER.sM
202 0 El último elemento destinatario no es miembro de sER.sC
203 0 El último elemento destinatario no es miembro de sER.sH
204 0 La destinación no es miembro de sER.sA
210 sEECtrl.sChk.uiReadStartAddr Expiración del tiempo de espera del ciclo de actualización
211 sEECtrl.sChk.uiReadStartAddr Error incorregible en EEPROM
212 sEECtrl.eSeq_State Estado inválido
215 uiEEFaultAddr Error incorregible en los parámetros programados
216 uiEEFaultAddr Error incorregible en los datos vanos
217 uiEEFaultAddr Error incorregible en la curva programada
220 0 pucDst == NULO
222 uiEEStartAddr Dirección EEPROM inválida
240 uiEEStartAddr ¡Escritura fuera del área de seguridad!
241 uiEEStartAddr La dirección de arranque en el área de seguridad no es un múltiplo de 3
242 uiEEStartAddr ¡Escritura fuera del área sin seguridad!
243 uiEEStartAddr ¡La dirección de arranque se encuentra en el área reservada!
244 ulReqFIFOSpace No hay espacio FIFO suficiente
250 (ulong32)pucDst Error de lectura durante la actualización - posible célula RAM defectuosa
300 0 Tiempo de espera sICom.uiRxLiveTimer expirado
301 0 Tiempo de espera sICom.uiRxLiveTimer expirado
350 0 Tiempo de espera sICom.uixLiveTimer expirado
360 0 Tiempo de espera para salir de DUAL_BEF_CHECK_PARAM
361 0 ¡FIFO está lleno!
380 uiBPP_HPPunktNr Error de la llamada de uiPutPunkt()
381 0 ¡Mando de control de la estanqueidad en presencia de BM_FAT_KALTCHECK!
382 0 Tiempo de espera en la comparación cíclica de los parámetros
383 uiBCP_AnzParam[0] DUAL_BEF_CHANGE_PARAM1: Valor inválido en el tope de recepción
384 uiBCP_AnzParam[1] DUAL_BEF_CHANGE_PARAM2: Valor inválido en el tope de recepción
385 sRx.Buffer.ui[ucRxOK-1][uiSTART- ¡Verificación cíclica de los parámetros: parámetros diferentes entre HP y UP!
BEF+47]
386 uiParaIdx ¡Verificación de los parámetros PowerOn: parámetros diferentes entre HP y UP!
410 sIO.sIn.ulInputsN ¡Detectada semi-onda positiva en la entrada del borne!
411 estado de la entrada recibido por UP Estados de la entrada diferentes entre los reguladores
412 0 La entrada de la lectura del relé de la selección del combustible en un combustible dual
es inválida. Probable error del DFM
420 uil El estado de entrada de la entrada digital en HP y UP no corresponde (>20ms)
430 ucPin2Test ¡La prueba de la patilla de cortocircuito ha detectado un error! La patilla testada no está
configurada como salida o está bloqueada en 1
88
431 ucPin2Test ¡La prueba de la patilla de cortocircuito ha detectado un error! cortocircuito entre patillas,
tracción del estadio de entrada defectuosa o la patilla está bloqueada al exterior en 1
440 0 sIO.sIn.uiTestSignal Tiempo de espera expirado
450 0 El relé de potencia principal (K2) no se apaga correctamente cuando no está alimentado.
451 ucRelay El relé no se acciona correctamente cuando el relé de potencia no está habilitado (para
detalles, ver enumteRelais)
460 uiFaultParam Error en el encendido de los relés de potencia o en la lectura de las bobinas del relé
del K1 o K2Param2: si la línea de lectura es errónea se programa el Bit 0, si la línea de
lectura de K2 es errónea se programa el Bit 1
461 uiFaultParam El estado de lectura del relé K1 o K2 es diferente del estado de encendido normal; el relé
seguramente es defectuoso. Param2:Bit 0: estado nominal del K1Bit 1: estado nominal
de K2 Bit 8: estado de la línea de lectura de K1 Bit 9: estado de la línea de lectura de K2
500 0 Espera para el final del ciclo de escritura
501 0 SLA+W ha sido transmitido; no se ha recibido ningún acuse de recibo
502 0 SLA+R ha sido transmitido; no se ha recibido ningún acuse de recibo
503 0 El byte de los datos ha sido transmitido; no se ha recibido ningún acuse de recibo
504 0 Error del BUS debido a una condición de ARRANQUE o PARADA irregular
505 0 Arbitraje perdido en SLA+RW o byte de datos
510 ulI2CStat ¡Estado desconocido/inválido!
600 sSRCtrl.uiOffset Corrección del triplo defectuoso en la estructura de la RAM de seguridad no conseguido
610 (ulong32)pucDst Dirección de destino inválida
620 (ulong32)puiDst Dirección de destino inválida
630 (ulong32)pulDst Dirección de destino inválida
700 0 Autoprueba CPU no conseguida
701 sSelftest.sMngr.eState Evaluación del estado de la máquina no conseguida con AC_ERR
710 sSelftest.sWD.eErrorState Autoprueba de vigilancia no conseguida
711 sSelftest.sWD.eState Caso de error inválido
720 Selftest.sVM.ucTest2Perform Caso de error inválido
721 Selftest.sVM.eErrorState Autoprueba de control de la tensión de suministro no conseguida
722 Selftest.sVM.eState Caso de error inválido
730 sSelftest.sRR.eErrorState Autoprueba del circuito de descarga del relé no conseguida
731 sSelftest.sRR.eState Caso de error inválido
740 sSelftest.sRPW.eErrorState Autoprueba del circuito de descarga PWR del relé no conseguida
741 sSelftest.sRPW.eState Caso de error inválido
750 0: Chimenea USR, 1: chimenea IRQ Detectado exceso en la chimenea
751 0 La dirección de la chimenea está indicada por NULO
752 0 La dirección de la chimenea está indicada por NULO
800 sWDog.ulReleasePtrn1 ¡Los esquemas de descarga de la activación son inválidos!
810 eFeedIndex Índice de alimentación inválido
820 eTriggerCtrl Modalidad de activación inválida
830 0 Ninguna activación de vigilancia correcta ha sido recibida (frecuencia o ciclo de trabajo
inválidos)
900 uiErrorCode Error desde el gestor del error LPC_API
920 0 Entrada inválida en iStoerResRam
930 uiMaskedFaultCode ¡iuiMaskedFaultCode fuera banda!
1200 0 La señal de la llama no desaparece durante la autoprueba
1210 sIFD.eTestState Caso de error inválido
1220 sIFD.uiClock Los impulsos de la prueba faltan en el UP
1221 sIFD.uiClock La duración de la señal de la prueba es demasiado breve
1222 sIFD.uiClock La duración de la señal de la prueba es demasiado breve
1240 0 Cortocircuito de LDR detectado
1250 uiADValue Autoprueba del circuito no conseguida, valor A/D fuera de la banda esperada
1260 sLDR.eTestState Caso de defecto inválido
1270 sLDR.uiClock Intervalo de la prueba demasiado largo
89
1271 sLDR.uiClock El HP ha dejado la patilla de la prueba demasiado tarde

1272 sLDR.uiClock El HP ha dejado la patilla de la prueba demasiado temprano
1290 uiMyFlames XOR uiPartnerFlames Las señales de la llama en ambos reguladores no corresponden (bit 0: llama principale,
bit 1: llama de encendido)
1300 0 El puntero para transmitir el tope es NULO
1400 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_INTERFAZ_TIPO_ACTUADOR_INVÁLIDO
1401 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_INTERFAZ_DIRECCIÓN_INVÁLIDA
1405 0 H_SA_INTERFAZ_CÁLCULO_RAMPA_ERRÓNEO
1406 0 ulGradientMax <= ulGradientDesired
1410 0 H_SA_INTERFAZ_CÁLCULO_RAMPA_ERRÓNEO
1411 0 H_SA_INTERFAZ_TEMPORIZACIÓN_ERRÓNEA
1415 psActuator->ucSANumber ¡psActuator->ucSANumber inválido!
1420 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_INTERFAZ_CÁLCULO_RAMPA_ERRÓNEO
1430 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_REACCIÓN_REACCIÓN_ERRÓNEA
1435 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_PLAUSIB_ACTUADOR_FUERA_BANDA
1436 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_PLAUSIB_CUENTA_SECCIÓN_FUERA_BANDA
1440 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_REFERENCIA_INVESTIGACIÓN_NINGUNA_REFERENCIA
1450 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_STEPCALC_LLAMADA_CUENTA_EXCESO
1451 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_STEPCALC_CUENTASECCIÓN_FUERA_BANDA
1452 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_STEPCALC_DIRECCIÓN_INVÁLIDA
1453 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_STEPCALC_CUENTASECCIÓN_FUERA_BANDA
1454 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_STEPCALC_DIRECCIÓN_INVÁLIDA
1455 psActuator->ucSANumber H_SA_STEPCALC_ESTADO_ERRÓNEO
1460 0 U_SA_INTERFAZ_TIPO_ACTUADOR_INVÁLIDO
1461 0 U_SA_INTERFAZ_DIRECCIÓN_INVÁLIDA
1470 psActuator->ucSANumber U_SA_REACCIÓN_DIRECCIÓN_INVÁLIDA
1471 psActuator->ucSANumber U_SA_REACCIÓN_DIRECCIÓN_INVÁLIDA
1472 psActuator->ucSANumber U_SA_REACCIÓN_REACCIÓN_ERRÓNEA
1480 psActuator->ucSANumber U_SA_REFERENCIA_INVESTIGACIÓN_TIPO_ACTUADOR_INVÁLIDO
1500 0 Tiempo de espera durante el envío del mando ICOM
1501 0 Tiempo de espera para acuse de recibo del mando ICOM
1502 0 Tiempo de espera para el final de la inicialización del actuador
1505 Número del actuador HP: configuración inválida. Los parámetros del tipo de actuador no pueden ser diferentes
de 1 o 2
1505 Número del actuador ÜP: configuración inválida. Los parámetros del tipo de actuador no pueden ser diferentes
de 1 o 2
2000-3999:errores internos generados del interior de la aplicación (FAT y Sistema)

D1 D2 Descripción
2000 Evento desconocido por parte del mecanismo que controla el evento
2001 Demasiados eventos
2100 Entrada del tope inválida
2101 EEprom probablemente defectuoso
2200 Índice inválido para SQBLData00
2206 Índice inválido para SQBLDataKurven
90
2207 Índice inválido para SQBLDataPara

2209 Petición de un bloqueo de datos, ninguna trasmisión.
2300 Estado inválido
2302 Eliminación de la curva, final de El
2305 Número del parámetro inválido (no existe)
2306 Estado inválido (control en frío)
2307 Control en frío
2350 - Control en frío
2354 Intentar escribir a un registro modbus
2400 Descripción de un registro modbus
2401 Parámetro con nivel de acceso > 4
2500 No se encuentra la modalidad de funcionamiento
2600 Transferencia prohibida
2601 Eliminación de la curva, dejado El
2700 La presión del aire no baja pero el quemador se acciona igualmente
2800 Más válvulas han sido abiertas durante el control en frío
2801 La modalidad de mantenimiento en el regulador principal está activa, pero no hay
2802 modalidad de mantenimiento parametrizada
2803 La modalidad de mantenimiento está activa, pero todavía está encendido
2804 El quemador se acciona, mientras que el supervisor está bloqueado
2805 El quemador se acciona, pero no hay prueba de referencia
2806 El estado inviado por HP para el funcionamiento de estadios no parece plausible
2900 La carga del programa por parte del temporizador es demasiado alta
3000 Todos los errores, por los que no se ha registrado ningún número del error
3100 Mensaje de error de un módulo de contraseña
3101 Mensaje de error del módulo de contraseña
3200 Exceso interno, el resultado intermedio no corresponde a la variable
3201 Exceso del resultado final
3230 La versión UP es diferente de la versión HP
3250 Parámetro inválido para el regulador de encendido del quemador de estadios
3300 Caso de defecto del control en secuencia BrennUm inserido
3301 Caso de defecto de la prueba de estanqueidad del control en secuencia BrennUm inserido
3302 Caso de defecto del control en secuencia FAT
3303 Caso de defecto del control en secuencia postventilación
3304 Caso de defecto de la prueba de estanqueidad del control preventilación inserido
3305 Caso de defecto del control del encendido inserido
4000-4999: errores internos generados del interior de la aplicación (control de la relación combustible/
aire)
D1 D2 Descripción
4000 0 No hay punto de la curva en la carga del punto de encendido
4001 0 ucPIdx_R >= ucPunktAnzahl
4100 sRampe.ucState valor inválido de sRampe.ucState
4200 ucVBMode valor inválido de ucVBMode
4302 0 No está definido ningún canal del aire (error de parametrización)
4400 ucSteuerArtEx valor inválido de ucSteuerArtEx
4401 0 Tiempo de espera para
91
4402 ucSteuerArtEx valor inválido de ucSteuerArtEx

4403 ucKanStat (ucKanStat & Def_VKM2_MSK) != Def_VKM2_DVAL
4404 0 Tiempo de espera para
4405 ucKanStat ¡El canal deshabilitado se está desplazando!
4406 ucRzStState[ucKnr] valor inválido de ucRzStState[ucKnr]
4407 ucVBStat valor inválido de ucVBStatn
4500 0 ¡sRampe.uiLaufzeit == 0!
4501 ucKnr IfKM_VB() a 0
4600 ucVorgabe valor inválido de ucVorgabe
4601 (sRampe.uc2VBKMsk En VSM_NOVB no pueden estar activos los canales VB
sRampe.ucVBKMsk)
4602 sRampT.ucNState Estado de defecto desconocido
4603 sRampe.ucState valor inválido de sRampe.ucState
4700 0 ¡Tiempo de la rampa expirado!
4701 Número del canal transferido fuera de la banda permitida
4705 ucKnr Número del canal transferido fuera de la banda permitida
4800 uiActTmr ¡ucErg > 0!
4801 ucSgIdx Modificación del parámetro Knf_uiActuatorDirX mientras el control de la relación
combustible/aire está activo o fuera de las modalidades de funcionamiento “Quemador
Off” o “Error”
4802 0 La banda admitida para el canal es demasiado pequeña para medir la velocidad máxima
4900 ucKnr División por 0
5000-5999:errores internos generados del interior de la aplicación (control de la combustión)

D1 D2 Descripción
5000 enInterneLastSeq valor inválido de enInterneLastSeq
5001 0 DPS+ / DPS ambiguos para la selección del estado de carga
5002 0 Error de la curva: no han sido determinadas la curva para gasóleos de estadios o la
velocidad del canal para los actuadores
5003 0 Parámetro inválido en la llamada de la función
5004 0 Los temporizadores para el control del tiempo del cambio del estadio no funcionan juntos.
Tiempo del cambio de la carga interna < tiempo supervisionado para la carga programada
5005 0 Curva del estadio inválida con carga interna establecida por el regulador de estadios
5007 0 Valor de la carga inválido durante el ajuste de la curva del gasóleo de estadios
5008 0 Modalidad de control de la activación de estadios inválida
92
Errores internos 6000-6999 generados del interior de la aplicación de control UP (control de la relación
combustible/aire)
D1 D2 Descripción
6000 ucSteuerArtEx Modalidad de control del canal desconocida
6001 ucBetrMoNr Se han detectado demasiadas direcciones de la banda
6100 ucKnr Modalidad de control del canal desconocida
6200 0 Evitar un ciclo infinito
6203 0 SSR.sS0.ucAkt SSR.sS0.uiKanalenb cambiado sin AufrufKurve2Workram
6204 0 No se ha encontrado un punto completamente válido, solamente una curva no vacía
6205 N ú m e r o d e l o s p u n t o s El número de los puntos no coincide con la curva Ram (error fatal con tarea)
detectados
6206 Índice de los puntos de la curva Escritura de la combustión no conseguida (error de la Ram)
operativa
6207 Índice de los puntos de la curva Punto de la combustión en la curva original inválido
original
6208 Índice de los puntos de la curva Índice del punto inválido
original
6209 0 La aproximación del punto no es posible, no hay un punto precedente
6210 0 La aproximación del punto no es posible, no hay un punto siguiente
6211 0 Aproximación del punto no conseguida, punto de acuerdo inválido
6212 Índice de los puntos de la curva Escritura del punto de referencia no conseguida (error de la Ram)
operativa
original
6214 0 La aproximación del punto no es posible, no hay un punto precedente
6215 0 La aproximación del punto no es posible, no hay un punto siguiente
6217 Índice de los puntos de la curva Escritura del valor de referencia de retorno no conseguida (error de la Ram)
operativa
original
6220 Índice de los puntos de la curva Corrección evaluada de la escritura del punto de referencia no conseguida (error de la Ram)
operativa
original
6222 0 Escritura no conseguida: Error de la Ram
6223 0 Escritura no conseguida: Error de la Ram
6224 Número de los errores Demasiadas diferencias entre las curvas (contador deslizable, substrato 1 por ciclo)
6225 Número del estado estado la máquina indefinido
6300 ucSMState Se ha detectado un estado la máquina indefinido
6400 ucKnr División por 0
93
11.6 DATOS TÉCNICOS

11.6.1 DATOS TÉCNICOS BT300
Función
Alimentación eléctrica: 230V +10/-15% 47-63Hz115V +10/-15% 47-63Hz (a demanda)
Pre-fusible máximo: 10A de tensión
Utilizar sólo en una red eléctrica conectada a tierra.
Consumo de energía: máx. 30 VA
Entrada digital de la señal: La capacidad parásita de la red conectada a las entradas digitales no puede
superar los 2.2. mF durante los autodiagnósticos del BT300.
Nota: Longitud máx. de la red 10m (véase capítulo 11.3 Diagramas de conexión)
Salidas digitales: 3 válvulas combustible máx. 1 A cos Φ 0,4

VL máx ventilador. 2 A cos Φ 0,4
bomba gasóleo máx. 2 A cos Φ 0,4
transformador de encendido máx. 2 A cos Φ 0,2
salida alarma máx. 1 A cos Φ 0,3
Resolución: 999 números, 10 bit
Número de curvas: BT320/330: 1 serie de curva (gasóleo o gas)
BT340: 2 series de curva (gasóleo/ gas intercambiables; DFM300 o LCM100 necesarios)
Número de programas: ilimitado (EEPROM)
Acoplamiento de buses de PROFIBUS
campo (opcional): LCM100 siempre necesario
Alojamiento: Policarbonato + ABS
Dimensiones: 200x115x61mm
Peso: 1,0kg
Inflamabilidad: UL-94 V0 (panel: UL-94 V2)
Pantalla
Pantalla: 128x64 pixeles, monocromo
Luz blanca de fondo (asombrable)
Dimensiones: 112x64x24
Peso: 140g
Alojamiento: Alojamiento básico: ventana de pantalla LCD en fibra de vidrio reforzada poliamida Policarbonato
Inflamabilidad: Alojamiento básico UL-94 V0
ventana de pantalla LCD UL-94 V2
94
Condiciones ambientales
Funcionamiento Condiciones climáticas Clase 3K5 conformemente a DIN EN 60721-3
Condiciones mecánicas Clase 3M5 conformemente a DIN EN 60721-3
Campo de temperatura -20...+60°C (ninguna condensación)
Transporte Condiciones climáticas Clase 2K3 conformemente a DIN EN 60721-3
Almacenamiento Condiciones climáticas Clase 1K3 conformemente a DIN EN 60721-3
Seguridad electrónica Grado de protección (DIN EN60529) BT300: Alojamiento IP40, terminales IP20
UI300 IP40 (bloqueo de nivel) IP54 (unión pegada)
11.6.2 ACTUADORES 662R550...
Función
Tiempo de flotación 5s / 90° a 180 Hz
Dirección de rotación 0° to 90° derecha
Par de apriete 0.8 Nm (ambas direcciones)
Pareja estática 0.4 Nm (sin energía)
0.7 Nm
Cargo radial admisible 30 Nm (centro del árbol motor)
Cargo axial admisible 5N
Desplazamiento axial del árbol 0.1...0.2 mm
motor
Condiciones ambientales
Funcionamiento Condiciones climáticas Clase 3K3 conformemente a DIN
EN 60721-3
Condiciones mecánicas Clase 3M3 conformemente a DIN
EN 60721-3
Campo de temperatura -20...+60? (ninguna condensación)
Transporte Condiciones climáticas Clase 2K3 conformemente a DIN
EN 60721-3
EN 60721-3
Almacenamiento Condiciones climáticas Clase 1K3 conformemente a DIN
EN 60721-3
EN 60721-3
R e s i s t e n c i a a l Tensión de cresta 4 kV
estallido Frecuencia de repetición 2,5 kHz
Seguridad eléctrica Clase de protección 2 conformemente a
DIN EN 6072160730
95
11.6.3 ACTUADORES 662R550... / 662R5003...
Función 662R5001... 662R5003... 662R5010...

Tiempo de flotación 5s / 90° 5s / 90° 15s / 90°
Dirección de rotación 0° to 90° a la izquierda del árbol motor
Torsión efectiva de salida 1.2 Nm (ambas direcciones de 3 Nm (ambas direcciones de 10 Nm (ambas direcciones
rotación) rotación) de rotación)
Mantenimiento a temperatura 0.82 Nm (sin energía) 2.8 Nm (sin energía) 6 Nm (sin energía)
Cargo radial permisible 100 N (centro del árbol motor)
Cargo axial permisible 10 N
Desplazamiento axial del 0.1...0.2 mm 0.1...0.2 mm
árbol motor
Motor Motor de paso RDM 51/6
Resolución angular 0.1° / paso del motor 0.1° / paso del motor 0.03° / paso del motor
Control del codificador a 0,7°
resolución nominal
Precisión de control ±0,5° ±0,5° ±1,3125 (igual a 44 pasos
del motor)
Precisión de repetición ±0,1° ± 0,1° ±0,1°
Tiempo de vida 2000000 movimientos adelante y atrás, distribuidos durante la duración total del servicio
Grado de protección IP54 conformemente a DIN EN 60529-1
Peso 1400g
Condiciones ambientales 662R5001... / 662R5003... 662R5010...

Funcionamiento Condiciones climáticas Clase 3K5 conformemente a DIN EN
60721-3
Condiciones mecánicas Clase 3M5 conformemente a DIN EN
60721-3
Transporte Condiciones climáticas Clase 2K3 conformemente a DIN EN
60721-3
60721-3
Almacenamiento Condiciones climáticas Clase 1K3 conformemente a DIN EN
60721-3
60721-3
Resistencia al estallido Tensión de cresta 4 kV
Frecuencia de repetición 2,5 kHz
Seguridad eléctrica Clase de protección 2 conformemente a DIN
EN 6072160730
PART C:
MAINTENANCE
1 PERIODICAL CONTROL
WARNINGS
• Carry out all maintenance bearing in mind what stated in the chapter WARNINGS
• Ensure that all activity on the burner are done with electrical mains connections switched off
• Ensure that also fuel lines are shut off
If the burner is installed in a suitable environment and a clean fuel is being used, there is no need for
frequent maintenance interventions.
Obviously, gas filter, flame protection disk and ignition electrodes should be periodically cleaned.
We recommend to perform the first checks weekly and to adjust accordingly.
After first period we recommend to carry out at least maintenance operations once a year. If the
burner is subject to seasonal and/or limited period activity it is recommended to proceed in the
operations immediately after the season ending with further round of checks before new ignitions.
PERIODICAL SERVICING
ACTIVITY TIMING
Cleaning of photocell ONCE A WEEK

Checking photocell functioning: simulate flame disappear ONCE A WEEK
by removing photocell from the burner to chek burner stop
Cleaning and examination gas filter ONCE A WEEK
Checking of possible fuel leakage ONCE A WEEK
Checking of fuel pressure ONCE A WEEK
Checking of the combustion head firing condition from view ONCE A WEEK
glass
Cleaning and greasing of leverages and rotating parts ONCE A MONTH
Cleaning nozzle ONCE A MONTH

Cleaning oil filter ONCE A MONTH
Cleaning Y filter ONCE A MONTH
FULL CHECKS WITH AUTHORIZED GB SERVICE TWICE A YEAR
(FOR SEASONAL OPERATION) BEFORE AND AFTER

WORKING SEASON
2 TROUBLE SHOOTINGS
FAULTS: Causes and remedies for natural gas burners.
TROUBLESHOOTING POSSIBLE CAUSES REMEDY
The burner won’t start. 1) No control panel power 1) Check switch position and
supply. main fuses integrity and
auxiliary circuits protection
fuses.
2) Level control device 2) Feed the boiler and check
consent missing. the driving circuits of level
controls.
3) Pressure gauges or 3) Check the line continuity and
thermostats line open or the position of all thermostats
interrupted. and pressure gauges.
4)The minimum 4) Check the micro-switch and
microswitch of the the mechanical position of the
modulation engine is not modulation engine.
closed.
5) Faulty photoelectric cell 5) Check the photoelectric cell
(ultraviolet luminosity in efficiency. In case substitute it.
furnace) Check connection and relative
relay efficiency. Check there is
no luminosity (flame) in the
furnace.
6) The gas pressure control 6) Check the pressure to be in
gauges ( minimum and the limits allowed by the gauge
maximum, if installed) and (the intercept gates must be
the air control gauge do open and the pressure reducing
note sense the conditions valve musty work regularly).
to let the burner start up. The contact that surveys the
lack of air pressure in the air
control gauge must be closed. If
necessary replace the air
gauge that does not work
regularly.
7) Programmer relay is 7) Replace it.
faulty or defective.
The fan engine works, 9)The air gauge does not 9) Remove dirt (dust, downy
the gas solenoid valves sense pressure due to the hair or else).
do not open and the presence of dirt in the air

burner locks out. pressure sensing pipe or in
the air conveyor (among
the adjustment blades).
10) The air gauge does not 10) Check the adjustment value
sense pressure because of the gauge and correct it if
set to a too high value. necessary.
11) Faulty or defective air 11) Replace it. (check to have a
gauge or with to high suitable calibration scale).
calibration scale
12) Ignition is missing. 12) The opening of gas valves

occurs only if the photoelectric
cell senses the ignition (spark
between the electrodes) Refer
to 13÷18 13-14-15-16-17-18.
The fan engine works, 13) Check the correct 13) The ignition transformer
no ignition, gas valves working of the air pressure works only if the air pressure
do not open and the gauge. gauge has sensed a sufficient
burner <<locks out>>. pressure. Check if the air
pressure gauge works correctly.
14) Electrodes end dirty. 14) Clean it.
15) The electrode ends are 15) Check electrode position
too far away or in wrong and correct it according to
position or they spark to the drawing specifications.
ground.
16) Dirty or cracked 16) Clean them carefully or
electrode insulators replace if necessary. The
(porcelain). porcelain insulator is in good
conditions when no cracks are
present, even if very small and
the color (white or pink) can be
easily seen.
17) High voltage cables are 17) Secure them correctly or
not perfectly secured to the replace if necessary.
transformer and to the
electrodes or they are worn
out and spark to the
ground.
18) No supply to the ignition 18) Check the connection line

transformer. between the programmer relay
and the ignition transformer and
restore if missing the circuit
continuity. Also check that the
programmer relay supplies
voltage to the terminals
corresponding to the
transformer. Otherwise replace
the programmer.
The fan engine works, 19) The photoelectric cell 19) Clean up the photoelectric
there is ignition (spark does not sense the spark cell or correct the position.
between the electrodes) between the electrodes
but the gas valves do because dirty or in faulty
not open and the burner position. 20) Reverse the connection
<<locks out>>. 20) Reversed polarity. cables. Check connections and
Photoelectric cell restore circuit continuity or, if
connections cut off or necessary, replace the
photoelectric cell is faulty. photoelectric cell.
21)Programmer photoelectric 21) Replace the whole
cell circuit faulty. programmer unit.
The fan engine works, 22) Expected depression in 22) In some cases the
there is ignition (spark the combustion chamber if depression can be reduced by
between the electrodes) the boiler (depression type) partially closing the chimney
but the pilot flame do is equipped with smoke shutter gate. More often it is
not appear or turns off suction. necessary to slow down the fan
immediately after rotation speed by replacing the
appearing and the pulleys or assembling an
burner <<locks out>>. engine with a higher number of
poles (to which corresponds a
slower rotation speed).
23) Flame disk too near the 23) Adjust the position of the
gas outlet. disk inserting few washers as
spacer (proceed step by step
increasing the distance of 0.12
in. At a time and checking the
results obtained).
The burner ignites (pilot 24) The flame comes off 24) Reduce the air from
flame) but <<locks the disk due to an excess of combustion or reduce the
out>> immediately after. air from combustion or supply of gas to pilot.
excess of gas to the pilot
burner.
25) The flame comes off 25) Check the distance
the disk because the between the disk and the
position of the stokehole in stokehole and, if necessary,
comparison with the disk is change it following the quotes

not correct. on the drawing.
26) Insufficient gas supply 26) Check the filter to be clean
and, if necessary, operate on
the burner gas supply pressure
reducer.Warning: never exceed
the gas supply pressure value
provided for the stated burner.
The flame is too yellow 27) Insufficient combustion 27) Add air from combustion or
and could have a strong air Incorrect calibration of reduce supply of gas. Check
presence of carbon the stokehole. the distance between the disk
dioxide (CO2). and the stokehole and, if
necessary, change it following
the quotes on the drawing.
Blue flame with 28) Excess of air from 28) Reduce combustion air.
presence of carbon combustion or incorrect Check the distance between
monoxide (CO). calibration of the stokehole. the disk and the stokehole and,
if necessary, change it following
the quotes on the drawing.
White smoke at the 29) Excessive smoke 29)Check for cold air infiltration
chimney outlet. cooling along the chimney along the piping conveying the
before the outlet into the smokes to the outlet. Close
atmosphere. crack and openings if any, with
suitable material.
Consider that if the same
chimney is used by two or more
boilers, it could be necessary to
close the shutter gates of the
boiler which are not running. If
necessary insulate at best all
the piping conveying the
smokes to the outlet.
30) Gas-air wrong ratio 30) Check with suitable gauges
and if necessary readjust as
described in the specific
chapter.
Water in the combustion 31) Gas-air wrong ratio 31) See 30.
chamber or in the boiler-
chimney connection.
32) Insufficient gas supply 32) Check gas supply and
change if necessary, making
reference only to the capacity
stated on the boiler plate.
Obviously in this case
combustion adjustment is
required. Check using the
special tools.
DATASHEET
CONTROLLER LCM 100
LCM 100
1
CONTROLLER LCM 100
PREMESSE
La presente guida rapida è un sunto del manuale Basic documentation del produttore.
E’ rivolto esclusivamente per una immediata e veloce operatività nell’installazione e funzionamento dei nostri bruciatori.
Per eventuali consultazioni più dettagliate fare riferimento alla manuale utente completo del regolatore consultabile sul sito..
COMPONENTI OPZIONALI.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
ACCESSO ALLE FUNZIONI DI REGOLAZIONE.............................................................................................................................................................. 9
ACCESSO ALLA FUNZIONE REGOLAZIONE DELLA TEMPERATURA......................................................................................................................... 11
ACCESSO ALLA FUNZIONE REGOLAZIONE DELLA PRESSIONE............................................................................................................................... 12
ACCESSO ALLA FUNZIONE REGOLAZIONE DELLA SONDA ESTERNA CLIMATICA.................................................................................................. 14
ACCESSO ALLA FUNZIONE SEGNALE ESTERNO (4-20 ma, 0-10 dps potenziometro)..................................................................................... 16
ACCESSO ALLA FUNZIONE SET-POINT REMOTO (4-20 mA)....................................................................................................................................... 17
2
CONTROLLER LCM 100
COMPONENTI OPZIONALI
9.1.1 Limiti della gamma 9.1.2 Inserimento del set point
per il controllo di potenza
Occorre impostare valori limite per i parametri che comandano l'accensione
e lo spegnimento del bruciatore. Se il bruciatore si spegne e la temperatura
attuale non ha ancora raggiunto la temperatura di accensione, il display
informa l'operatore che la centralina di potenza non si avvia.
Usare le frecce per selezionare

il punto di accensione o
spegnimento e successivamente
1 Verificare che il DIP1 sia a "1" per
! poter comunicare con la centralina.
per impostare il setpoint di
0 commutazione.
Se si confermano le impostazioni con INVIO in un intervallo di

tempo preimpostato, il valore viene memorizzato nel parametro.
In caso contrario, le modifiche del valore saranno respinte.
3
CONTROLLER LCM 100
9.1.3 Descrizione del funzionamento manualmente o automaticamente tramite un potenziometro (o

commutato tramite le resistenze).
L'avvio del bruciatore è descritto come sopra, ma lo sblocco dell'avvio del
Collegando un interruttore di commutazione è possibile implementare
bruciatore deve provenire dalla centralina di potenza, ovvero il valore attuale
deve essere al di sotto del valore di set point. Il bruciatore si avvia solo la riduzione notturna invece del controllo delle condizioni
quando il segnale "Bruciatore On" e lo sblocco provengono dalla centralina di atmosferiche. Il controllo delle condizioni atmosferiche e la riduzione
carico. La centralina di potenza funziona solo quando il bruciatore è acceso notturna possono essere implementati contemporaneamente,
e il segnale "Sblocco del controllo" è stato dato. Il valore predefinito di carico combinando il controllo delle condizioni atmosferiche alla
per il composto viene quindi impostato tramite la centralina di potenza commutazione del set point.
integrata. Esso dipende dalla differenza tra il valore attuale, il valore di set
point e i parametri di controllo impostati. Se il valore attuale supera il valore
massimo impostato, la centralina di potenza interrompe la combustione. La
centralina di potenza è attiva solo in modalità "automatica".
9.1.4 Controllo delle

condizioni atmosferiche
Se il controllore di accensione del bruciatore è configurato come
"controllato dalle condizioni atmosferiche", il valore di set point può
essere spostato fra il valore minimo di set point parametrizzato
e il valore massimo di set point collegando un altro sensore di
temperatura Pt100/Pt1000 ai terminali 25, 26 e 27. Nel controllo delle
condizioni atmosferiche la temperatura esterna è un componente
del calcolo del set point. Ciò permette all'operatore di inserire un
set point minimo e massimo, entro i quali la temperatura esterna
determina il valore del set point finale.
Fig. 9-1 Controllo delle condizioni atmosferiche

Con l'opzione "Controllo delle condizioni atmosferiche" è possibile
preimpostare un set point esterno.
9.1.5 Commutazione del set point

É possibile commutare il set point tramite l'ingresso "commutazione
set point" al terminale 5. Se si utilizza una versione con valore di set
point fisso, è possibile selezionare uno dei due valori che vengono
inseriti nei parametri P0048 e P0050 con questo contatto. Se è stato
attivato anche il controllo delle condizioni atmosferiche, è possibile
scegliere tra una delle due coppie di valori limite (vedi controllo
delle condizioni atmosferiche e limiti della gamma). I parametri del
set point 1 (per la commutazione del set point) e il set point minimo
1 (per il controllo delle condizioni atmosferiche) sono uguali. Lo
stesso vale per i parametri del set point 2 e il set point minimo 2.
Il contenuto viene assegnato in base alla configurazione. Quando
viene attivata l'opzione "controllo delle condizioni atmosferiche"
e vengono impostati i parametri, è possibile creare un set point
esterno di default. Ciò significa che il set point può essere impostato
4
CONTROLLER LCM 100
9.1.11 Assistenza alla configurazione
Caratteristica Processo di Modalità di Procedura di

controllo controllo avviamento
Term P diminuzione reazione più avviamento
maggiore dell'attenuazione forte con più rapido con
overshoot overshoot
Term P aumento reazione avviamento
minore dell'attenuazione minore, minore rallentato
tendenza
all'oscillazione
Fig. 9-4 funzionamento del regolatore con term P-term troppo alto

Term I term diminuzione maggiore avviamento
maggiore dell'attenuazione reazione con rapido con
tendenza tendenza
all'oscillazione all'oscillazione
Term I aumento reazione avviamento
minore dell'attenuazione minore, minore rallentato
tendenza
all'oscillazione Fig. 9-5 funzionamento del regolatore con term I troppo alto

Term D diminuzione reazione avviamento
maggiore dell'attenuazione maggiore rallentato,
diminuzione
di potenza
anticipata
Term D aumento reazione avviamento
minore dell'attenuazione minore rapido,
diminuzione di Fig. 9-6 funzionamento del regolatore con term D troppo alto
potenza ritardata
4 / 18 5
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
9.1.12 Interruttore DIP 9.1.13 LED

Grazie agli interruttori DIP è possibile configurare tutte le LCM100 ha tre LED che devono essere collegati come descritto:
impostazioni di LCM100.
LED Colore Pertinenza
ERR (LED 1) rosso Durante il funzionamento normale, il LED
è spento. II LED si accende nei seguenti
casi:
- Inizializzazione non pronta o non
eseguita con successo (ad es.
impossibile inizializzare HW)
- Impossibile ricevere messaggi
per almeno 3 secondi
CAN (LED 2) verde Spento: Regolatore CAN in Bus-Off.
Nessuna comunicazione possibile
Lampeggiante: Il regolatore CAN ha
rilevato un'anomalia temporanea. Dopo
aver risolto il problema, il LED continua
a lampeggiare per un po' di tempo.
Acceso: CAN è pronto.
PWR (LED 3) verde A c c e s o : I l m o d u l o f u n z i o n a
normalmente = inizializzato e senza errori
1
0
Funzioni degli interruttori DIP
Con l'interruttore DIP 1 è possibile attivare o disattivare la resistenza
terminale CAN.
Interruttore DIP 1
0 Resistenza terminale CAN inattiva
1 Resistenza terminale CAN attiva
Grazie agli interruttori DIP 2 - 3 è possibile impostare la famiglia LSB.
Interruttore DIP 2 Interruttore DIP 3 Famiglia LSB

0 0 1
0 1 2
1 0 3
1 1 4
Grazie agli interruttori DIP 4 - 6 è possibile impostare gli ingressi

del sensore.
Interruttore Interruttore Interruttore
Ingresso
DIP 4 DIP 5 DIP 6
0 X X PT100 Sensore di temperatura caldaia
1 X X PT1000 Sensore di temperatura caldaia
PT100 Sensore di
X 0 X
temperatura ambiente
PT1000 Sensore di
X 1 X
temperatura ambiente
X X 0 PT100 Sensore di temperatura fumi
X X 1 PT1000 Sensore di temperatura fumi
5 / 18 6
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
9.1.14 Collegamento elettrico

Collegare il modulo LCM100 della centralina di potenza a BT300
tramite la spina X31 e i terminali LCM 10 - 13.
Quando si collega LCM100 a BT300, gli ingressi Last- e Last+

i non saranno più supportati dalla spina X09. É importante
collegare questi segnali a LCM100 come contatti a potenziale
zero (Vedi capitolo 9.1.14.2 Assegnazione del terminale).
di accensione
Ingresso manuale
Te m p e r a t u r a e s t e r n a /
Disattivazione della centralina

Temperatura acqua caldaia /
Valore attuale della pressione

Temperatura fumi
regolare
Spostamento set point
Resistenze da 2,2 kΩ
TPS (Step a tre punti)

di potenza
vapore
Potenziometro
0...10V
0/4...20mA
LED1 = Acceso
LED2 = Errore
LED3 = Traffico dati CAN
CAN Rx
CAN Tx
V5
VSS
L
N
4...20mA uscita di controllo (+)
4...20mA uscita di controllo (-)

Set point di commutazione

interfaccia CAN da BT300
Ingresso di riserva
Ingresso di rete
Contatore olio
Contatore gas
GND
24V
6 / 18 7
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
Assemblaggio del cavo Tipo Schermatura Lunghezza 9.1.14.2 Assegnazione dei terminali
max. cavo [m]
LCM100 ha una alimentazione 24V per il trasmettitore di pressione
Rete C.A. in - 100 e per le alimentazioni degli altri moduli LSB.
24V esterno C.C. - 100 La corrente massima è 400mA per tutte le alimentazioni.
out Questa alimentazione è parallela all'alimentazione 24V di LSB.
BT-CAN IO - 1
É vietato alimentare il terminale LSB di LCM100 dall'esterno.
CAN IO X 100
!
Misurazione olio combustibile I - 10 Commutazione del set point
Misurazione gas I - 10
Commutazione del set point I - 10
Ingresso di riserva I - 10
Temperatura fumi I X 100
Temperatura ambiente I X 100
Temperatura acqua caldaia I X 10
Pressione vapore I X 10
Ingresso combinazione I X 100
20mA
Te r m i n a l e i n g r e s s o I X 100 Fig. 9-8 Connessione di commutazione del set point
combinazione 18
Uscita di controllo O X 100 Uscita Analogica (Terminali 7; 8)
In questa uscita è possibile usare i "valori analogici" interni (ad es.
I = Ingresso valore interno per un sistema di controllo esterno).
I cavi devono essere schermati.
O = Uscita !
CA = Ingresso in corrente alternata; 90 - 250V c.a. 47 - 63Hz
É possibile usare diversi valori per il funzionamento a gasolio (P
CC = Alimentazione in corrente continua 0020) e a gas (P 0021) e la potenza in uscita per il funzionamento
In caso di schermatura del condotto, questa deve essere a gasolio (P 0024; P 0028) e a gas (P 0025; P 0029).
i memorizzata in un terminale separato sul PE. Interfaccia CAN (Terminali 10 - 13)
Si consiglia di usare la spina BT300 X31 per il collegamento e il
cavo con numero d'ordine LAMTEC 667P0515 per il LCM100. La
spina X31 è già installata su questo cavo e i numeri dei terminali
per LCM100 sono indicati sui fili.
Ingresso di potenza L; N (Terminali 14; 15)
Collegare l'ingresso di potenza (90 - 250V 47 - 63Hz) a questi
terminali, in modo che LCM100 fornisca tensione a LSB (max.
400mA).
Ingresso esterno di accensione regolare (Terminali 16 - 19)
Con segnali 4-20mA / 0-10V fare ponte tra terminali 22 - 23.

!
Fig. 9-9 Possibilità di collegamento dell'ingresso esterno di

modulazione
8
CONTROLLER LCM 100
Occorre attivare LCM100 tramite P 0040, in modo che

i gli ingressi LCM100 vengano interpretati come ingresso
esterno di accensione regolare. Impostare P 0040 a 1 o 2.
Inoltre, i terminali 22 e 23 devono essere cortocircuitati. 0...4-20 mA
Selezionare la modalità dell'ingresso esterno di accensione tramite
P 0065.
Connessioni ai terminali 20 - 30
Fig. 9-14 Set point remoto
Con segnali 4-20mA /0-10V fare ponte terminali 23-24

Fig. 9-10 Valore attuale del collegamento pressione vapore
Fig. 9-11 Valore attuale del collegamento temperatura caldaia
Fig. 9-12 Collegamento temperatura ambiente / Spostamento set

point
Fig. 9-13 Collegamento temperatura fumi
8 / 18 9
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
ACCESSO ALLE FUNZIONI DI REGOLAZIONE
SCHERMATA INIZIALE
• Premere enter
• Premere il tasto
• per selezionare la funzione Setting
• Premere enter
• Selezionare per entrare nel menu password
• Premere enter
• Verificare la password (0000),
• Premere enter
• Selezionare con le frecce l'icona
• Premere enter
9 / 18 10
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Selezionare
• Premere enter
• Selezionare
• Premere enter
• Per attivare il regolatore interno posizionarsi sul riquadro
corrispodente al simbolo
• Per attivare il regolatore interno con curva climatica osizionarsi
sul riquadro corrispodente al simbolo
• Premere enter
• Premere enter per confermare i parametri immessi.
• Premere exit
10 / 18 11
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Premere exit
ACCESSO ALLA FUNZIONE REGOLAZIONE DELLA TEMPERATURA
• Posizionarsi con su per accedere alla selezione

dell'unità di misura,
• Premere enter
• Selezionare con °C in base al tipo di sonda,
• Premere enter per selezionare l'unità di misura desiderata,
• Premere enter per confermare la selezione.
• Premere exit
• Selezionare con ,
• Premere enter per confermare la selezione.
12
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Posizionarsi con sui set point per variare i seguenti

parametri,
-- SPEGNIMENTO (SET POINT + VALORE)
-- COMANDO AL MINIMO (SET POINT + VALORE)
-- SET POINT CALDAIA
-- ACCENSIONE (SET POINT - VALORE)
• Premere enter per memorizzare i parametri
• Premere exit
• Premere enter
• Impostare i dati come in tabella,

Installazioni Acqua I n s t a l l a z i o n i
Calda Caldaia a Vapore
Term P 200 120 600
Term I 600 60 300
Termn D 200 60 25
Te m p o d i 15 15 20
regolazione
• Premere enter per confermare
• Premere exit tre volte per tornare alla videata principale.
ACCESSO ALLA FUNZIONE REGOLAZIONE DELLA PRESSIONE
Per accedere al settaggio della pressione seguire i

! passaggi del capitolo "ACCESSO ALLE FUNZIONI DI
REGOLAZIONE".
• Selezionare con
12 / 18 13
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Selezionare bar con le frecce
• Premere enter due volte per confermare
• Premere exit per tornare alla videata principale.
• Selezionare

parametri,
-- COMANDO AL MINIMO (SET POINT + VALORE)
-- SET POINT CALDAIA
• Premere exit
• Selezionare
• Impostare i valori di sonda min. e max.

(esempio: sonda 0-16 bar 4 mA =0 / 20 mA =160)
13 / 18 14
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Premere enter

Installazioni Acqua I n s t a l l a z i o n i
Calda Caldaia a Vapore
Term P 200 120 600
Term I 600 60 300
Termn D 200 60 25
Te m p o d i 15 15 20
regolazione
ACCESSO ALLA FUNZIONE REGOLAZIONE DELLA SONDA ESTERNA CLIMATICA

Per accedere al settaggio della sonda esterna climatica
! seguire i passaggi del capitolo "ACCESSO ALLE FUNZIONI
DI REGOLAZIONE".
• Selezionare con
• Selezionare impostare P40 = 2
• Premere exit .
15
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Premere enter
• Impostare la temperatura esterna minima e massima,
• Premere exit
• Premere enter

parametri,
-- COMANDO AL MINIMO (SET POINT - VALORE)
-- SET POINT MINIMO CALDAIA
-- ACCENSIONE (SET POINT VALORE)
• Premere exit
• Premere enter
16
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Impostare solamente la temperatura massima.
• Premere enter
• Premere enter

Installazioni Acqua Calda I n s t a l l a z i o n i
Caldaia a Vapore
Term P 200 120 600
Term I 600 60 300
Termn D 200 60 25
Te m p o di
15 15 20
regolazione
ACCESSO ALLA FUNZIONE SEGNALE ESTERNO (4-20 ma, 0-10 dps potenziometro)
DI REGOLAZIONE".
• Selezionare con
• Premere enter
• Premere exit
16 / 18 17
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Selezionare con
• Premere enter
• Selezionare il tipo di segnale di modulazione
• Premere exit tre volte per andare alla schermata principale
ACCESSO ALLA FUNZIONE SET-POINT REMOTO (4-20 mA)

DI REGOLAZIONE".
• Selezionare con
• Premere enter
• Premere exit
• Selezionare con
• Premere enter
17 / 18 18
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Impostare min 40, max 200
• Premere exit
• Selezionare con
• Premere enter

parametri,
-- SPEGNIMENTO
-- COMANDO AL MINIMO (SETPOINT + VALORE)
-- SET POINT MINIMO CALDAIA
• Premere exit
• Selezionare con
• Premere enter
• Impostare temperatura massima caldaia S1 max
• Premere exit
18 / 18 19
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
INTRODUCTION
This quick guide is a summary of Basic documentation manual.
Its purpose is to allow the user an immediate and quick installation and operation of the burners.
For further and more detailed information consult the manufacturer control equipment manual available on website.
OPTIONAL COMPONENTS.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
ACCESS TO THE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS............................................................................................................................................................... 9
ACCESS TO THE TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION..................................................................................................................................... 11
ACCESS TO THE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION............................................................................................................................................ 12
ACCESS TO THE CLIMATIC EXTERNAL PROBE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION.............................................................................................................. 14
ACCESS TO THE EXTERNAL SIGNAL FUNCTION (4-20 ma, 0-10 dps potentiometer)...................................................................................... 16
ACCESS TO THE REMOTE SET POINT FUNCTION (4-20 mA)..................................................................................................................................... 17
20
CONTROLLER LCM 100
OPTIONAL COMPONENTS
9.1.1 Range Limits 9.1.2 Enter set point of power control
You must set limit values in the parameters, which switch the burner on
and off. If the burner shuts down and the actual temperature has not yet
reached the switch-on threshold again, a display informs the operator that
the power control unit refuses a start-up.
Use the arrowkeys to select the

switching point (ON or OFF)
Check that the DIP1 is on “1” in and to adjust the switching
1 ! order to communicate with the point after-wards.
0 control unit
If you confirm the settings with ENTER in a preset time slot, the
value is stored in the parameter. Otherwise the changes value
is rejected.
2 / 18 21
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
9.1.3 Operating Description atmospheric conditions and a night-time reduction can be realised
simultaneously, if you combine the control by atmospheric conditions
The start of the burner is described as above. Only the burner start release
with the set-point switching.
must be forthcom-ing from the power control unit, i.e. the actual value must
be correspondingly below the set-point value.The burner starts only when
the signal "Burner On" and the release are forthcoming from the load
control unit. Only when the burner is ON and the "Control release" signal
has been given does the power control unit function. The load default for the
compound is then set via the in-tegral power control unit. It is dependent on
the difference between the actual and the set-point value and the adjusted
control parameters. Should the actual value exceed the adjusted maximum
value, the power control unit switches off the combustion.The power control
unit is only active in the "automatic" mode.
9.1.4 Control by Atmospheric Condition

If the burner firing-rate controller is configured as "controlled by
atmospheric conditions" the setpoint value can be shifted between
the parameterised setpoint minimum and setpoint max-imum
by connecting another Pt100/Pt1000 temperature sensor to the
terminals 25, 26 and 27. In the realize by atmospheric conditions,
the outside temperature is a component of setpoint calculation. This
allows the operator to enter a minimum and a maximum setpoint,
between which the outside temperature can determine the final
setpoint value.
Fig. 9-1 Control by atmospheric conditions

With the option "Control by atmospheric condition" you may realise
an external setpoint pre-setting.
9.1.5 Setpoint Changeover

You can switch the setpoint with the input "setpoint switchover" at
terminal 5. If you use a ver-sion with fixed setpoint value it is possible
to select one of the two values, which are entered in the parameters
P0048 and P0050 with this contact.If you have activated the control
by atmospheric conditions additionally, you can select be-tween two
pairs of limit values (see control by atmospheric conditions and limit
ranges). The parameters for setpoint 1 (for setpoint switching) and
setpoint min. 1 (for control by atmos-pheric conditions) are equal.
Likewise the parameters setpoint 2 and setpoint min. 2. The cor-
responding content is assigned according to the configuration.When
activating the "control by atmospheric conditions” option and setting
the adjustable pa-rameters, you may realise an external setpoint
default. In other words, the setpoint can be ad-justed manually or
automatically via a potentiometer (or switched through resistors).
By connecting a change-over switch, you can implement a night-time
reduction instead of control by atmospheric conditions. A control by
3 / 18 22
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
9.1.11 Aides for Setting
Characteristic Control Control Mode Start-up

Process Procedure
P term higher decrease of stronger reaction faster start-up
attenuation with overshoot with overshoot
P term smaller increase of less reaction, slower startup
attenuation less tendency to
oscillate
Fig. 9-4 controller operation with P-term too high
Characteristic Control Control Mode Start-up

Process Procedure
I term higher decrease of stronger reaction faster start-up
attenuation with tendency to with tendency
oscillate to oscillate
I term smaller increase of less reaction, slower start-up
attenuation less tendency to
oscillate
Fig. 9-5 controller operation with I-term too high
Characteristic C o n t r o l Control Mode S t a r t - u p

Process Procedure
D term higher decrease of s t r o n g e r slower start-up,
attenuation reaction earlier decrease
of power
D term smaller increase of less reaction faster start-up,
attenuation decrease of
power later
Fig. 9-6 controller operation with D-term too high
4 / 18 23
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
9.1.12 DIP Switch 9.1.13 LEDs

With the aid of DIP switches, you can configure all the settings of The LCM100 has thre LEDs which should be connected as
LCM100. mentioned by the following:
LED Colour Relevance

ERR (LED 1) red During normal operation, the LED is
switched off. It will light up under the
following conditions:
- Initialisation not ready or not
successfully come to an end (e.g.
HW could not be initialised)
- Cannot receive any messages
for at least 3 seconds
CAN (LED 2) green OFF: CAN Controller in Bus-Off. No
communications possible.
Blinking: CAN Controller discovered a
temporary fault. After fixing the problem,
the LED would still blink for some time.
ON: CAN is ready to operate.
PWR (LED 3) green ON: Module is working normally = fully
initialised and without any fault.
1
0
Functions of the DIP switches
By using DIP switch 1, you can activate or deactivate the CAN
terminating resistor.
DIP switch 1
0 CAN terminal resistence inactive
1 CAN terminal resistance active
By using DIP switches 2 - 3, you can set the LSB Family.
DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3 LSB Family

0 0 1
0 1 2
1 0 3
1 1 4
By using DIP switches 4 - 6, you can set the sensor inputs.
DIP DIP DIP

Input
switch 4 switch 5 switch 6
0 X X PT100 Boiler temperature sensor
1 X X PT1000 Boiler temperature sensor
X 0 X PT100 Ambient temperature sensor
X 1 X PT1000 Ambient temperature sensor
X X 0 PT100 Flue gas temperature sensor
X X 1 PT1000 Flue gas temperature sensor
5 / 18 24
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
9.1.14 Electrical Connection

Connect the power control unit module LCM100 to the BT300 via
plug X31 and LCM terminals 10 - 13.
As soon as you connect a LCM100 to the BT300, the inputs

i Last- and Last+ would no longer be supported by the plug
X09. It is very important that you connect these signals as
potentialfree contacts to the LCM100 (see chapter 9.1.14.2
Terminal Assignment).
Manual regular
Outside temperature / set-point shift
Boiler water temperature /

Deactivation of power control unit
firing rate input

Steam pressure actual value
Flue gas temperature
Resistenze da 2,2 kΩ
TPS (Three-Point-Step)
Potentiometer
0...10V
0/4...20mA
LED1 = Power ON
LED2 = Error
LED3 = CAN data traffic
CAN Rx
CAN Tx
V5
VSS
L
N
4...20mA monitor output (+)
4...20mA monitor output (-)
CAN interface from BT300

Set-point changeover
Gas fuel meter
Network input
Oil fuel meter
Reserve input
GND
24V
6 / 18 25
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
Cable assembly Type Schield Cable length 9.1.14.2 Terminal Assignment

max. [m]
LCM100 has a 24V power supply for the pressure transmitter and
Mains AC in - 100 for the power supplies of other LSB modules.
24V external DC out - 100 The maximum current is 400mA for all power supplies.
BT-CAN IO - 1 This power supply is parallel to the 24V power supply of the LSB.
CAN IO X 100
You are not allowed to feed the LSB terminal of LCM100 from
Fuel measurement oil I - 10 ! externally.
Fuel measurement gas I - 10
Setpoint changeover
Setpoint changeover I - 10
Reserve input I - 10
Flue gas temperature I X 100
Ambient temperature I X 100
Boiler water temperature I X 10
Steam pressure I X 10
Combination input 20mA I X 100
Combination input term. 18 I X 100
Monitor output O X 100
Fig. 9-8 Setpoint changeover connection

I = Input
O = Output Analogue Output (Terminal 7; 8)
AC = Alternating current input;90 - 250VAC 47 - 63Hz In this output, you could use the internal "analogue values" (e.g.
internal value for an external control system).
DC = Direct current supply
The cables must be schielded!
As soon as duct shielding is expected to occur, this must be !
i stored in a seperate terminal on PE.
You can set different values for oil operation (P 0020) and gas
operation (P 0021) and the scale of output for oil operation (P 0024;
P 0028) and gas operation (P 0025; P 0029).
CAN Interface (Terminal 10 - 13)
We recommend you to use BT300 plug X31 for the connection
and prefabricated cable with LAMTEC Order No. 667P0515 for the
LCM100. The plug X31 is already installed on this cable and the
terminal numbers for the LCM100 are marked on the wires.
Power input L; N (Terminal 14; 15)
Connect the power input (90 - 250V 47 - 63Hz) to these terminals,
so that LCM100 can supply voltage to LSB (max. 400mA).
External regular firing rate input (Terminal 16 - 19)
Con segnali 4-20mA / 0-10V fare ponte tra terminali 22 - 23.

!
Fig. 9-9 Connection possibilities of the external firing rate input

modulation
7 / 18 26
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
You must activate LCM100 via P 0040, in order for

i LCM100 inputs to be interpreted as external regular
firing rate input. Please set P 0040 to value 1 or 2.
Furthermore, the terminals 22 and 23 should be short-circuit.
0...4-20 mA
Please choose the mode of the external firing rate input via P 0065.
Terminal connections 20 - 30
Fig. 9-14 Set point remote
• With 4-20mA/0-10V signals, make a jumper across terminals

23-24
Fig. 9-10 Actual value of steam pressure connection
Fig. 9-11 Actual value of boiler temperature connection
Fig. 9-12 Ambient temperature connection / Setpoint shift
Fig. 9-13 Flue gas temperature connection
8 / 18 27
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
ACCESS TO THE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS
HOMESCREEN
• Press Enter
• Press key
• to select the Setting function
• Press Enter
• Select to access the password menu
• Press Enter
• Verify the password (0000),
• Press Enter
• Select icon using arrow keys
• Press Enter
9 / 18 28
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Select
• Press Enter
• Select
• Press Enter
• Move to the box corresponding to symbol to activate

the internal regulator.
• Move to the box corresponding to symbol to activate

the internal regulator with climatic curve.
• Press Enter
• Press Enter to confirm the entered parameters.
• Press Exit
10 / 18 29
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Press Exit
ACCESS TO THE TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION
• Using move to to access the selection for the unit

of measurement,
• Press Enter
• Using select °C according to the type of probe,
• Select the required unit of measurement pressing Enter ,
• Press Enter to confirm the selection.
• Press Exit
• Select with ,
• Press Enter to confirm the selection.
11 / 18 30
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Use to move to the set pints to change the following

parameters,
-- SWITCHING OFF (SET POINT + VALUE)
-- COMMAND AT THE MINIMUM SETTING (SET POINT + VALUE)
-- BOILER SET POINT
-- SWITCHING ON (SET POINT - VALUE)
• Press Enter to store the parameters.
• Press Exit
• Select with ,
• Press Enter
• Set data as indicated on the table,

Hot Water Installations S t e a m B o i l e r
Installations
P term 200 120 600
I term 600 60 300
D term 200 60 25
Adjustment time 15 15 20
• Press Enter to confirm.
• Press Exit three times to return to the main screen.
ACCESS TO THE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION
To access and set the pressure follow the steps of chapter

! "ACCESS TO THE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS".
• Select with
12 / 18 31
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Select bar using the arrow keys
• Press Enter twice to confirm
• Press Exit to return to the main screen.
• Select
• Use to move to the set points to change the following

parameters,
-- BOILER SET POINT
-- SWITCHING ON (SET POINT - VALUE)
• Press Exit
• Select
• Set the min. and max. probe values

(e.g. probe 0-16 bar 4 mA =0 / 20 mA =160)
13 / 18 32
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Select with ,
• Press Enter

Hot Water Installations S t e a m B o i l e r
Installations
P term 200 120 600
I term 600 60 300
D term 200 60 25
ACCESS TO THE CLIMATIC EXTERNAL PROBE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION
To access and set the climatic external probe follow the steps
! of chapter "ACCESS TO THE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS".
• Select with
• Select and set P40 = 2
• Press Exit
14 / 18 33
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Select with ,
• Press Enter
• Set the minimum and maximum external temperature,
• Press Exit
• Select with ,
• Press Enter

parameters,
-- COMMAND AT THE MINIMUM SETTING (SET POINT - VALUE)
-- BOILER MINIMUM SET POINT
-- SWITCHING ON (VALUE SET POINT)
• Press Exit
• Select with ,
• Press Enter
15 / 18 34
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Only set the maximum temperature.
• Press Enter
• Select with ,
• Press Enter

Hot Water Installations Steam Boiler
Installations
P term 200 120 600
I term 600 60 300
D term 200 60 25
ACCESS TO THE EXTERNAL SIGNAL FUNCTION (4-20 ma, 0-10 dps potentiometer)
• Select with
• Press Enter
• Press Exit
16 / 18 35
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Select with
• Press Enter
• Select the type of modulation signal
• Press Exit three times to go to the main screen.
ACCESS TO THE REMOTE SET POINT FUNCTION (4-20 mA)
• Select with
• Press Enter
• Press Exit
• Select with
• Press Enter
17 / 18 36
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Set min 40, max 200
• Press Exit
• Select with
• Press Enter

parameters,
-- SWITCHING OFF
-- BOILER MINIMUM SET POINT
-- SWITCHING ON (VALUE - SET POINT)
• Press Exit
• Select with
• Press Enter
• Set the boiler maximum temperature S1 max
• Press Exit
18 / 18 37
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
INTRODUCTION
Ce guide rapide est un résumé du manuel de la documentation de base.
Son objectif est de permettre à l'utilisateur d'installer et de faire fonctionner immédiatement et rapidement les brûleurs.
Pour tout renseignement complémentaire, consulter le manuel de l'équipement de commande disponible sur site web.
COMPOSANTS OPTIONNELS......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
ACCES AUX FONCTIONS DE REGLAGE....................................................................................................................................................................... 9
ACCES A LA FONCTION DE REGLAGE DE LA TEMPERATURE................................................................................................................................... 11
ACCES A LA FONCTION DE REGLAGE DE LA PRESSION........................................................................................................................................... 12
ACCES A LA FONCTION DE REGLAGE DE LA SONDE CLIMATIQUE EXTERNE........................................................................................................ 14
ACCES A LA FONCTION SIGNAL EXTERNE (4-20 ma, 0-10 dps potentiomètre)................................................................................................ 16
ACCES A LA FONCTION POINT DE CONSIGNE DISTANT (4-20 mA)........................................................................................................................... 17
1 / 18 38
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
COMPOSANTS OPTIONNELS
9.1.1 Limites de gamme 9.1.2 Entrer le point de consigne
du contrôle de puissance
Saisir les valeurs limite parmi les paramètres permettant de mettre le brûleur
sous et hors tension. Si le brûleur s'arrête et si la température actuelle n'a
pas encore atteint le seuil de déclenchement, une page-écran communique
à l'opérateur que le boîtier de commande de puissance refuse un démarrage.
Utiliser les flèches pour

sélectionner le point de
Vérifier que DIP1 est à "1" pour commutation (ON ou OFF)
1 ! et corriger le point de
pouvoir communiquer avec la
0 centrale commutation par la suite.
Si l'on confirme les réglages avec ENTER durant un intervalle

de temps prédéterminé, la valeur est mémorisée parmi les
paramètres. Dans le cas contraire, le changement de valeur
est refusé.
2 / 18 39
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
9.1.3 Description du fonctionnement fonction de la configuration. Lorsqu'on active l'option "contrôle

aux conditions atmosphériques” et lorsqu'on saisit les paramètres
Le démarrage du brûleur est décrit ci-dessus. Seul le déclenchement de
susceptibles d'être corrigés, on peut réaliser un point de consigne
démarrage du brûleur doit provenir du boîtier de commande de puissance,
c'est-à-dire que la valeur actuelle doit être respectivement inférieure à la externe par défaut. En d'autres mots, le point de consigne peut
valeur de consigne. Le brûleur démarre exclusivement lorsque le signal être corrigé manuellement ou automatiquement au moyen d'un
"Brûleur On" et le déclenchement proviennent de l'unité de commande. Le potentiomètre (ou commuté par l'intermédiaire de résistances).
boîtier de commande de puissance fonctionne uniquement lorsque le brûleur En connectant un interrupteur de commutation, on peut exécuter
est ON (sous tension) et que le signal de "Déclenchement" a été envoyé. une baisse nocturne à la place du contrôle aux conditions
Le chargement par défaut concernant le composé est alors établi par atmosphériques. On peut exécuter simultanément un contrôle aux
l'intermédiaire du boîtier de commande de puissance intégré. Cela dépend conditions atmosphériques et une baisse nocturne, si l'on combine
de la différence entre la valeur de consigne actuelle et les paramètres de le contrôle aux conditions atmosphériques et la commutation de
contrôles corrigés. Si la valeur actuelle dépasse la valeur maximale corrigée, consigne.
le boîtier de commande de puissance arrête la combustion. Le boîtier de
commande de puissance n'est actif qu'en modalité "automatique".
9.1.4 Contrôle aux conditions

atmosphériques
Si le contrôleur du niveau de combustion du brûleur est configuré
comme étant "contrôlé aux conditions atmosphériques" la valeur
de consigne peut être déplacée entre les points de consigne
paramétré minimum et maximum en connectant un autre capteur
de température Pt100/Pt1000 aux terminaux 25, 26 et 27. Durant le
contrôle aux conditions atmosphériques, la température externe est
un élément du calcul du point de consigne. Cela permet à l'opérateur
d'entrer un point de consigne minimum et maximum entre lesquels
la température externe peut déterminer la valeur de consigne finale.
Fig. 9-1 Contrôle aux conditions atmosphériques

Grâce à l'option "Contrôle aux conditions atmosphériques" on peut
effectuer un pré-réglage du point de consigne externe.
9.1.5 Modification du point de consigne

On peut changer le point de consigne au moyen de l'entrée
"commutation point de consigne" au niveau du terminal 5. Si l'on
utilise une version avec une valeur de consigne établie, il est possible
de sélectionner une des deux valeurs saisies parmi les paramètres
P0048 et P0050 au moyen de ce contact. Si l'on a également activé
le contrôle aux conditions atmosphériques, on peut faire un choix
entre deux paires de valeurs limite (voir contrôle aux conditions
atmosphériques limites). Les paramètres pour le point de consigne
1 (pour la commutation de consigne) et le point de consigne min. 1
(pour le contrôle aux conditions atmosphériques) sont identiques. Il
en est de même pour le point de consigne 2 et le point de consigne
min. 2 des paramètres. Le contenu correspondant est attribué en
40
CONTROLLER LCM 100
9.1.11 Aides pour le réglage
Caractéristique Processus Modalité de Procédure de

de contrôle contrôle démarrage
Terminal P plus diminution de réaction plus démarrage plus
haut l'atténuation f o r t e a v e c rapide avec
dépassement dépassement
Te r m i n a l P augmentation réaction moins d é m a r r a g e
inférieur d e i m p o r t a n t e , plus lent
l'atténuation m o i n d r e
tendance à
osciller Fig. 9-4 fonctionnement du contrôleur avec terminal P trop haut
Caractéristique Processus Modalité de Procédure de

de contrôle contrôle démarrage
Terminal I plus diminution de réaction plus démarrage
haut l'atténuation f o r t e a v e c plus rapide
tendance à avec tendance
osciller à osciller
Terminal I plus augmentation réaction moins d é m a r r a g e
petit d e i m p o r t a n t e , plus lent
l'atténuation m o i n d r e
tendance à Fig. 9-5 fonctionnement du contrôleur avec terminal I trop haut
osciller
Caractéristique Processus de Modalité de Procédure de

contrôle contrôle démarrage
Terminal D plus diminution de réaction plu démarrage plus
haut l'atténuation forte lent, diminution
anticipée de la
puissance
Terminal D plus augmentation réaction moins d é m a r r a g e
petit d e importante plus rapide,
l'atténuation diminution
différée de la Fig. 9-6 fonctionnement du contrôleur avec terminal D trop haut
puissance
4 / 18 41
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
9.1.12 Commutateur DIP 9.1.13 DELs

Grâce aux commutateurs DIP, on peut configurer tous les réglages Le LCM100 compte trois DELs qu'il faut connecter tel qu'on l'indique
de LCM100. ci-après :
DEL Couleur Intérêt

ERR (DEL1) rouge La DEL est éteinte durant le
fonctionnement normal. Elle s'allume
dans les conditions suivantes :
- Initialisation pas prête ou non
concluante (ex. le matériel
ne peut pas être initialisé)
- impossible de recevoir
des messages pendant
au moins 3 secondes
CAN (DEL 2) verte OFF : Contrôleur CAN en Bus-Off. Pas
de communications possibles
Clignotante : Contrôleur CAN a relevé
un défaut temporaire. Après avoir résolu
le problème, la DEL peut clignoter
pendant un certain temps. ON : CAN
est prêt à fonctionner.
PWR (DEL 3) verte ON : Le module fonctionne
normalement = entièrement initialisé
1 et sans aucun défaut.
0
Fonctions des commutateurs DIP
En utilisant le commutateur DIP 1, on peut activer ou désactiver la
résistance terminale de CAN.
Commutateur DIP 1
0 résistance terminale de CAN désactivée
1 résistance terminale de CAN activée
En utilisant les commutateurs DIP 2 - 3, on peut régler le Groupe
LSB.
Commutateur Commutateur
Groupe LSB
DIP 2 DIP 3
0 0 1
0 1 2
1 0 3
1 1 4
En utilisant les commutateurs DIP 4 - 6, on peut régler les entrées

du capteur.
Commutateur Commutateur Commutateur
Entrée
DIP 4 DIP 5 DIP 6
0 X X Capteur de température PT100 de la chaudière
1 X X Capteur de température PT1000 de la chaudière
X 0 X Capteur de température ambiante PT100
X 1 X Capteur de température ambiante PT1000
X X 0 Capteur de température des gaz d'échappement PT100
X X 1 Capteur de température du fuel PT1000
5 / 18 42
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
9.1.14 Connexion électrique

Connecter le module du boîtier de commande de la puissance
LCM100 au BT300 par l'intermédiaire de la fiche X31 et des
terminaux LCM 10 - 13.
Dès que l'on connecte un LCM100 au BT300, les entrées

i Last- et Last+ ne sont plus supportées par la fiche X09. Il est
très important de connecter ces signaux en tant que contacts
potentiellement libres au LCM100 (voir chapitre 9.1.14.2
Affectation des terminaux).
Entrée manuelle
niveau d'allumage
Température externe / décalage
Température du gaz combustible
boîtier de commande de
Température de l'eau dans la
Valeur actuelle de la pression

chaudière / Désactivation du
régulier
Résistances de 2,2 kΩ
point de consigne
TPS (Three-Point-Step)
puissance
de vapeur
Potentiomètre
0...10V
0/4...20mA
DEL1 = Sous tension (ON)

DEL2 = Erreur
DEL3 = trafic de données CAN
CAN Rx
Interface CAN à partir de

CAN Tx
V5
VSS
Modification du point de consigne
L
N
Compteur de gaz combustible
4...20mA sortie écran (+)
4...20mA sortie écran (-)

Entrée de réserve
Compteur de fuel
Entrée réseau

BT300
GND
24V
6 / 18 43
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
Jeu de câbles Type Écran Longueur max. 9.1.14.2 Attribution des terminaux
câble [m]
LCM100 est alimenté en 24V pour le transmetteur de pression et
Secteur CA in - 100 pour l'alimentation électrique des autres modules LSB.
24V, externe CC out - 100 Le courant maximum est 400mA pour toutes les fournitures de
BT-CAN IO - 1 tension.
Cette alimentation électrique est parallèle à l'alimentation à 24V
CAN IO X 100
du LSB.
Mesure du fuel I - 10
Mesure du gaz combustible I - 10 Il est interdit de mettre le terminal LSB de LCM100 sous
Modification du point de I - 10 ! tension à partir de l'extérieur.
consigne
Modification du point de consigne
Entrée de réserve I - 10
Température du fuel I X 100
Température ambiante I X 100
Température de l'eau dans la I X 10
chaudière
Pression de la vapeur I X 10
Entrée de connexion 20mA I X 100
Entrée de connexion term. I X 100
18 Fig. 9-8 Connexion modification du point de consigne
Sortie Écran O X 100
Sortie analogique (Terminaux 7 ; 8)
Sur cette sortie, on peut utiliser les "valeurs analogiques" internes
I = Input (Entrée)
(ex. valeur interne pour système de commande externe).
O = Output (Sortie) Les câbles doivent être blindés !
AC = Alternating current input (Entrée courant alternatif) ;90 - 250VCA !
47 - 63Hz
On peut saisir différentes valeurs pour le fonctionnement au fuel (P
DC = Direct current supply (Fourniture de tension continu) 0020) et au gaz (P 0021) et différentes échelles de production pour le
fonctionnement au fuel (P 0024 ; P 0028) et au gaz (P 0025 ; P 0029).
Dès qu'on suppose que le blindage d'une conduite se
i produira, cela doit être mémorisé sur un terminal séparé Interface CAN (Terminaux 10 - 13)
dans PE. Il est recommandé d'utiliser une fiche X31 BT300 pour la connexion
et le câble préparé avec la commande LAMTEC N° 667P0515 pour
Fig. 9-9 Possibilités de connexion d'une entrée externe du niveau LCM100. La fiche X31 est déjà installée sur ce câble et les numéros
d'allumage des terminaux pour le LCM100 sont marqués sur les fils.
Entrée d'alimentation L ; N (Terminaux 14 ; 15)
Connecter l'entrée d'alimentation (90 - 250V 47 - 63Hz) à ces
terminaux, de manière à ce que LCM100 puisse fournir du courant
à LSB (max. 400mA).
Entrée externe du niveau d'allumage régulier (Terminaux 16 - 19)
Avec des signaux 4-20mA / 0-10V réaliser un pont entre les

! terminaux 22 - 23.
Fig. 9-9 Possibilités de connexion d'une entrée externe du niveau

modulation
7 / 18 44
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
Activer LCM100 par l'intermédiaire de P 0040, pour pouvoir

i interpréter les entrées LCM100 comme des entrées externes
du niveau d'allumage régulier. Régler P 0040 à la valeur 1 ou 2.
En outre, les terminaux 22 et 23 devraient être court-circuités. • 0...4-20mA
Choisir la modalité d'entrée externe niveau d'allumage par
l'intermédiaire de P 0065.
Connexions des terminaux 20 - 30
Fig. 9-14 Point de consigne distant
• Avec les signaux 4-20mA/0-10V créer le pont bornes 23-24

Fig. 9-10 Valeur actuelle de la connexion de la pression de vapeur
Fig. 9-11 Valeur actuelle de la connexion de la température

chaudière
Fig. 9-12 Connexion température ambiante / Décalage point de

consigne
Fig. 9-13 Connexion température du fuel
8 / 18 45
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
ACCES AUX FONCTIONS DE REGLAGE
PAGE D'ACCUEIL
• Appuyer sur Enter
• Appuyer sur la touche
• Pour sélectionner la fonction de réglage
• Appuyer sur Enter Fig. 9-14 Point de consigne distant
• Sélectionner pour accéder au menu des mots de passe
• Vérifier le mot de passe (0000),
• Sélectionner l'icône au moyen des touches flèches
9 / 18 46
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Sélectionner
• Sélectionner
• Se rendre sur la case correspondant au symbole

pour activer le régulateur interne.
• Se rendre sur la case correspondant au symbole

pour activer le régulateur interne avec la courbe climatique.
• Appuyer sur Enter pour confirmer les paramètres entrés.
• Appuyer sur Exit
10 / 18 47
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
ACCES A LA FONCTION DE REGLAGE DE LA TEMPERATURE
• En utilisant se rendre à pour accéder à la sélection

pour l'unité de mesure,
• En utilisant sélectionner °C suivant le type de sonde,
• Sélectionner l'unité de mesure requise en appuyant sur Enter
• Appuyer sur Enter pour confirmer la sélection.
• Sélectionner avec ,
• Appuyer sur Enter pour confirmer la sélection.
48
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Utiliser pour se rendre sur les points de consigne pour

modifier les paramètres suivants,
-- METTRE HORS TENSION (POINT DE CONSIGNE + VALEUR)
-- COMMANDER AU REGLAGE MINIMUM (POINT DE CONSIGNE
+ VALEUR)
-- POINT DE CONSIGNE CHAUDIERE
-- METTRE SOUS TENSION (POINT DE CONSIGNE - VALEUR)
• Appuyer sur Enter pour mémoriser les paramètres.
• Saisir les données tel qu'on l'indique dans le tableau,

Installations d'Eau Installation de
Chaude Chaudières à
Vapeur
Terminal P 200 120 600
Terminal I 600 60 300
Terminal D 200 60 25
Temps de réglage 15 15 20
• Appuyer sur Enter pour confirmer.
• Appuyer trois fois sur Exit pour revenir à la page-écran

principale.
ACCES A LA FONCTION DE REGLAGE DE LA PRESSION
Pour accéder à la fonction de réglage et régler la pression,

! suivre les étapes du chapitre "ACCES AUX FONCTIONS DE
REGLAGE".
12 / 18 49
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Sélectionner la barre avec les touches flèches
• Appuyer deux fois sur Enter pour confirmer
• Appuyer sur Exit pour revenir à la page-écran principale.
• Sélectionner

+ VALEUR)
-- POINT DE CONSIGNE CHAUDIERE
-- METTRE SOUS TENSION (POINT DE CONSIGNE - VALEUR)
• Sélectionner
• Saisir les valeurs min. et max. de la sonde

(ex. sonde 0-16 bars 4 mA =0 / 20 mA =160)
13 / 18 50
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100

Installations d'Eau Installation de
Chaude Chaudières à
Vapeur

principale.
ACCES A LA FONCTION DE REGLAGE DE LA SONDE CLIMATIQUE EXTERNE

Pour accéder à la fonction de réglage et régler la sonde
! climatique externe, suivre les étapes du chapitre "ACCES
AUX FONCTIONS DE REGLAGE".
• Sélectionner et saisir P40 = 2
14 / 18 51
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Régler la température extérieure minimale et maximale,

- VALEUR)
-- POINT DE CONSIGNE MINIMUM CHAUDIERE
-- METTRE SOUS TENSION (VALEUR DE CONSIGNE)
15 / 18 52
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Régler uniquement la température maximale.

Installations d'Eau I n s t a l l a t i o n d e
Chaude Chaudières à Vapeur

principale.
ACCES A LA FONCTION SIGNAL EXTERNE (4-20 ma, 0-10 dps potentiomètre)

16 / 18 53
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Sélectionner le type de signal de modulation

principale.
ACCES A LA FONCTION POINT DE CONSIGNE DISTANT (4-20 mA)

17 / 18 54
0006081547_201310
CONTROLLER LCM 100
• Régler min. 40, max. 200

-- METTRE HORS TENSION
+ VALEUR)
-- POINT DE CONSIGNE MINIMUM CHAUDIERE
-- METTRE SOUS TENSION (VALEUR - DE CONSIGNE)
• Régler la température maximale dans la chaudière S1 max.
18 / 18 55
0006081547_201310
Pressostato differenziale
per aria, gas di scarico
LGW…A2, LGW…A2P
5.13
Caratteristiche tecniche Approvazioni

Il pressostato differenziale LGW…A2, Certificato di collaudo di modello d'utilità
LGW…A2P, è un pressostato regolabile secondo le direttive CE per apparecchia-
per impianti di riscaldamento. Esso è ture per gas:
adatto per l'inserimento, lo stacco o la LGW...A2, A2P CE-0085 AQ 0673
commutazione di un circuito elettrico con
Printed in Germany • Rösler Druck • Edition 10.02 • Nr. 218 370
valore di pressione variabile su di un Certificato di collaudo di modello d'utilità

valore nominale tarato. Il valore nominale secondo le direttive CE per apparecchi a
(punto d'intervento), si può tarare su di pressione:
una rotella con scala graduata per la LGW...A2, A2P CE0036
taratura.Tipo LGW…A2P con tasto di con-
trollo integrato di serie, nella parte inferiore. Certificato collaudo TÜV, quale presso-
stato speciale secondo TRD 604 e d'istru-
Campo di impiego zione VdTÜV 100/1 noché classe "S" se-
Sorveglianza della pressione differenzia- condo EN 1854.
le nella tecnica di riscaldamento, ventila- Per il mercato nordamericano esecuzioni
zione e climatizzazione. Utilizzabile come speciali con registrazioni a norme UL, FM
rilevatore della pressione differenziale per e CSA.
aria, gas di combustione e di scarico e Omologazioni in altri importanti paesi,
gas non aggressivi. Esso non è tuttavia consumatori di gas.
1…4 adatto per gas combustibili tecnici.
Funzionamento Tasto di controllo LGW…A2P
Funzione circuito elettrico
Pressostato differenziale per i campi Il pressostato differenziale LGW…A2P
LGW...A2, LGW...A2P
di sovrapressione e di depressione. è dotato di un tasto di controllo.
con pressione in salita:
La pressione differenziale agisce at- Esso permette un facile controllo del-
1 NC apre, 2 NO chiude
traverso una membrana sul microin- le funzioni di sicurezza.
con pressione in discesa:
ter-ruttore, contro la forza della molla Premendo il tasto di controllo viene
1 NC chiude, 2 NO apre
di taratura. interrotto il collegamento con l’attac-
Il pressostato lavora senza energia co di pressione G 1/4 con scarico
ausiliaria. della pressione sotto la membrana. Il 2 NO
microinter-ruttore dell'apparecchio di COM
Pressostato differenziale LGW…A2 controllo della pressione commuta il
Il commutatore reagisce alle differen- contatto da NO a NC: 3
ze di pressione. Al superamento per Lasciando libero il tasto si forma di 1 NC
eccesso o per difetto del valore nomi- nuovo la pressione sotto la membra- p
nale tarato, esso innesta, stacca op- na e il microinterruttore ritorna nella
pure commuta il circuito elettrico. sua posizione iniziale.
Definizione della differenza di in-

tervento !p Pressione
al rilevatore
La differenza di intervento !p è la Tolleranza di taratura
differenza di pressione fra la pres- Pressione di
intervento superiore
commutazione !p
sione di intervento superiore e quella
in discesa
inferiore.
Differenza
press. in salita
Taratura con
in salita
Pressione di
intervento inferiore
Dimensioni [mm] LGW…A2 LGW…A2P

A
Ø 2,5 18,5
A ø 2,5 per spina apparecchio

DIN EN 175 301-803
B taglio longitudinale 0,8 e
18,5
taglio a croce DIN EN ISO 4757-Z2

60
32,4
1 Attacco pressione (+) Attacco di pressione (+) ø 4,6 utilizzabile

solo come presa di misura.
2 Attacco pressione (-) 10 Attacco di pressione disponibile
8
solo con filetta G 1/4.

3 soltanto LGW ... A2
7
opzione 1 SW 22
attacco pressione (+) G 1/4, conica
4 Tasto controllo p (+) Tappo per presa di pressione G 1/4 4 p(+)
B 72
Ø 3 x 10 alto
Ø 4,2
A
Ø 2,5 18,5
2
G 1/8
SW 14
53,7
15
82
18,5
46,5
Made in
25,9
Germany
Tappo di sfiato Made in Germany
per G 1/8
6,9
6,5
Ø 4,6
8,8
Ø 4,6
10
78,5 M20x1,5 53,7
3
87,5
44,6
Ø 3 x 8 profond
B 72
Ø 4,2
Made in
Germany
1
53,7
44,6
20
15
82
2
15,2
Made in Germany SW = Apertura chiave

10
15,2
82 M20x1,5 53,7
2…4
Dati tecnici
Max. pressione di esercizio: LGW 3 A2 - LGW 150 A2 500 mbar (50 kPa)
LGW 3 A2P - LGW 150 A2P 500 mbar (50 kPa)
Campi di pressione 0,4 - 3 mbar

1 - 10 mbar
2,5 - 50 mbar
30 - 150 mbar
Attacco pressione LGW A2: raccordo tubo flessibile ø 4,6 mm

LGW A2P: al centro del lato inferiore del corpo, filettatura conica G 1/4 per la
pressione superiore, con tasto di controllo e attacco per misuratore laterale
ø 4,6 mm oppure filettatura interna; G 1/8 per la pressione superiore.
Campi di temperatura temperatura ambiente -15 °C fino a +70 °C

temperatura fluido -15 °C fino a +70 °C
temperatura magazzinaggio -30 °C fino a +85 °C
Materiali corpo: policarbonato

interruttore: policarbonato
membrana: a base NBR
contatti di commutazione: standard: argento fine (Ag)
opzione: argento fine dorato (Au),
adatto per applicazioni DDC: DC 24 V; 0,01 A
Tensione di commutazione contatto Ag: AC eff. min. 10 V max. 250 V

DC min. 12 V max. 48 V
contatto Au: DC min. 5V max. 24 V
Corrente nominale contatto Ag: AC eff. 10 A

contatto Au: DC 20 mA
Corrente di commutazione contatto Ag: AC eff. max. 6A a cos ∀ 1

AC eff. max. 3A a cos ∀ 0,6
AC eff. min. 20 mA
DC min. 20 mA
DC max. 1 A
contatto Au: DC min. 5 mA max. 20 mA
Allacciamento elettrico standard: Ai morsetti filettati attraverso passacavo M20x1,5

esecuzione speciale: Spina a 3 poli per presa di rete a
norme DIN EN 175 301-803
Protezione IP 54 secondo IEC 529 (EN 60529), con isolamento protettivo
Taratura taratura a scelta con pressione in salita o in discesa, possibile sul luogo
Tolleranza di taratura ± 15 % deviazione punto d'inserimento riferito al valore nominale, tarato a

pressione in salita, membrana in posizione verticale
Posizione di montaggio
Posizione standard: membrana verticale; con montaggio orizzontale il pressostato scatta ad un aumento di
pressione di 0,5 mbar.
Con montaggio orizzontale capovolto il pressostato scatta ad una diminuzione di pressione di ca. 0,5 mbar.
Con il montaggio in una posizione intermedia il pressostato scatta ad una pressione diversa da quella nominale di
max. ± 0,5 mbar
3…4
Pressostato differenziale
per aria, gas di scarico
LGW…A2, LGW…A2P
Breve tabella tecnica 1mbar = 100 Pa = 0,1 kPa # 10 mm WS 1 Pa = 0,01 mbar # 0,1 mm WS
Tipo Esecuzione Codice Campo di Differ. d'interv

[Ag-M-V9] d'ordine taratura !p [mbar]
[mbar]
LGW A2 LGW 3 A2 107 409 0,4 - 3 ∃ 0,3

Pressostato LGW 10 A2 107 417 1 - 10 ∃ 0,5
differenziale LGW 50 A2 107 425 2,5 - 50 ∃1
LGW 150 A2 107 433 30 - 150 ∃3
LGW 3 A2P 120 204 0,4 - 3 ∃ 0,3

LGW 10 A2P 120 212 1 - 10 ∃ 0,5
LGW 50 A2P 221 207 2,5 - 50 ∃1
LGW 150 A2P 120 238 30 - 150 ∃3
Accessori per pressostati

LGW...A2, LGW...A2P
Set spina G3 a 3 poli sensa 231 770
Set presa a 3 poli + terra, GDMW grigio 210 318
Accessori Klima KS A2 214 828
Cantonale attacco a vite G 1/8 230 278
Cantonale attacco a vite G 1/4 230 279
Tasto supplementare di controllo PT 4 224 940
Piastra di fissaggio 230 301
Lampada a bagliore set di montaggio 230 V 231 773
Lampada a bagliore set di montaggio 120 V 231 772
Spia di segnalazione set di montaggio 24 V 231 774
Ci riserviamo qualsiasi modifica tecnica e costruttiva
Karl Dungs S.r.l. Karl Dungs GmbH & Co.

Via Carolina Romani, 35 Siemensstraße 6-10
I-20091 Bresso (MI) D-73660 Urbach, Germany
Tel.: +39-02-66 50 54 28 Telefon +49 (0)7181-804-0
Fax: +39-02-66 50 54 27 Telefax +49 (0)7181-804-166
e-mail info.i@dungs.com e-mail info@dungs.com
Internet www.dungs.com 4…4
(/(&7521,&,*1,7,21
75$16)250(56
7\SH7&$
DESCRIPTION
This range of electronic ignition transformers is
characterized by extremely limited overall dimensions and
is particularly suitable to equip forced draught burners for
gas and light or heavy oil, for civil and industrial
applications.
The working principle is due to the generation of high
frequency voltage by means of an electronic oscillator; the
resulting voltage is then increased by using a winding with
ferrite nucleus. In this way it is possible to reach output
voltage values up to 15 KV.
All types can be supplied with filter to minimize the
emission of electromagnetic interference. In this way this
series of electronic transformers is in compliance with the
directive 89/336/EEC without the use of external filters.
The transformers of this series can also be supplied for
permanent operation (100% duty cycle). For further
information see our technical leaflet on TC....S.
transformers.
FEATURES
Followings are the main features of this range of
transformers:
− available with inbuilt anti-emission filter;
− limited weight and overall dimensions;
− high efficiency and ignition power;
− low consumption;
− single pole or dual pole high voltage output;
different fixing and connecting systems.
AF099 rev.01 1/4

TECHNICAL DATA
TC1...A TC1...AF TC2...A TC2...AF
Number of poles 1 1 2 2
Output peak voltage KV (1) 15 15 2x10 2x10
Output effective voltage KV (1) 9 9 2x5 2x5
Output peak current mA (2) 45 45 55 55
Output effective current mA (2) 25 25 30 30
Output voltage frequency kHz (1) 6 6 6 6
Output voltage frequency kHz (2) 10 10 10 10
Inbuilt filter • •
Consumption VA (3) 45 45 55 55
(1) Open-circuit secondary with 30pF charge.

(2) Short-circuit secondary.
(3) 10mm discharge distance.
For instance, the denomination TC2LVPAF indicates that
- Supply voltage: 220/240V-50/60Hz
this type of transformer is provided with two lateral
on request: 110/120V-50/60Hz isolators, screw fixing system, output with outlet and anti-
- Operating cycle: 50% in 2 minutes
emission filter.
- Operating temperature range: -10°C +60°C
- Recommended distance between OVERALL DIMENSIONS
the electrodes: 3÷5 mm Fig.1 and Fig.2 show the main overall dimensions of these
- Max. ignition cable length: 1.5 m transformers.
- Standard supply cable length: 560 mm To fix the transformers screws type M4x40 or M5x40 must
- Weight: about 370 g be used; the oval fixing holes permit a variation of the
wheel base between 57 mm and 64 mm.
CONSTRUCTION
The working principle based on the use of a high frequency
electronic oscillator has allowed to realize a device with
limited dimensions and weight, but with high ignition power.
The electronic circuit and the transformer with ferrite
nucleus are bathed in a special kind of resin with good
thermal conductivity and a specific coefficient of expansion,
which grants high resistance to temperature variations and
to the overload due to protracted working.
An inbuilt varistor protects the appliance from possible
voltage transients in the electric network.
The transformers of this series are available in different
executions as regards the number of poles, the position of
the isolators, the type of connection and output and the
presence of anti-emission filter; on this subject, see the
following schemes:
standard versions:
TC X X X X A
   
   → C: output with cable (Fig.1 -Fig.2)
   P: output with outlet (Fig.4)
  
  → V: screw fixing system (Fig.5)
  T: fixing system with terminal ∅ 4 (Fig.5)
 
 → L: lateral isolators (Fig.1)
 S: bottom isolators (Fig.2)
↓
1: single pole
2: dual pole
Versions with inbuilt anti-emission filter:
TC X X X X A F
   
   → C: output with cable (Fig.1-Fig.2)
   P: output with outlet (Fig.4)
  
  → V: screw fixing system (Fig.5)
  T: fixing system with terminal ∅ 4 (Fig.5)
 
 → L: lateral isolators (Fig.1)
 S: bottom isolators (Fig.2) Fig.1
↓
1: single pole
2: dual pole
2/4 AF099 rev.01

Type "P"
Fig.4
The connection of high voltage cables can be of two types,

according to the terminals used inside the isolators:
connections can be executed by means of a screw or of a
cylindrical terminal with 4 mm diameter, as shown in Fig.5.
All connectors, including the ones complete with cable, can
be supplied on request.
Fig.2
CONNECTION
This range of ignition transformers has been realized in
order to be used with control boxes of our own production,
which can be mounted on the ignition devices by means of
fixing screws type M4x45, as shown in Fig.3.
All transformers can be supplied with cable or supply outlet; Type "V" Type "T"
see, for instance, Fig.4, which shows the dimensions of a
transformer provided with supply outlet and lateral
isolators. Fig.5
INSTALLATION
− Connect and disconnect the ignition transformer only
after interrupting the main supply.
− Respect the applicable national and European
standards (e.g. EN 60355-1 / prEN 50165) concerning
electrical safety.
− Make sure that the earth of the ignition transformer and
the earth of the electrical system are well connected.
− The device can be mounted in any position.
− Avoid putting high voltage cables next to other cables.
− Grant a protection degree suitable to the application.
ANTI-EMISSION FILTER
With particular reference to the use of ignition transformers
on oil or gas burners, you will find here below some
remarks about the application of these devices, resulting
from the research carried out by the Brahma Testing
Laboratory. This Laboratory, in compliance with EN55014
and with CISPR 16-1, is adequately equipped for the
measuring of electromagnetic interference on boilers,
burners, warm air generators and heating systems in
general.
Fig.3 According to the directive 89/336/EEC, the above
mentioned products are subjected to the measuring of
AF099 rev.01 3/4

conducted electromagnetic interference in the power
network, irradiated by the supply cable; the measuring is
carried out on the basis of a frequency range from 150KHz
to 30MHz in case of conducted interference, and from 30 to
300MHz in case of irradiated interference.
Electromagnetic interference is mainly due to power
variations in the electric circuits (i.e. current peaks); the
greater and faster these variations, the higher the
interference. In this case, the main source of interference is
the discharge of the ignition transformer: the irregular
discharge current causes the emission of interference on a
wide frequency range.
To keep the products within the limits allowed by the
present standards, a special capacitive-inductive filter is
generally installed in series to the main supply, in order to
reduce electromagnetic interference with frequency up to
20MHz approx. . A resistor of a few KΩs is mounted in
series to the ignition electrode to reduce the interference
with higher frequency, due to the high current peak
generated whenever an electric arc is produced. The
stronger the stray capacitance between ignition electrodes
and cables and burner metal casing, the higher the current
peak. The above mentioned resistor has the function of
keeping the current peak as low as possible; the closer to
the source of electric discharge, the greater the
effectiveness of the resistor.
Besides the obvious advantage of reduced assembly costs,
the fitting of an anti-emission filter inside the ignition
transformer ensures the elimination of electromagnetic
interference in close proximity to their source, without
involving the remaining electric circuit. However remember
that the anti-emission filter is not effective with frequency
values > about 20Mhz; in this case, if necessary, the only
possible solution is to mount a resistor in series to the
ignition electrode, as described above.
Finally, the following solutions are always effective to
reduce the emission of electromagnetic interference:
− ignition cables should be as short as possible (this will
reduce their stray capacitance and their possibility of
acting as antennas, transferring electromagnetic
interference to the nearby cables);
− use distributed resistance cables or mount a resistor
near the electrodes (few kΩs can reduce the current
peak);
− let ignition cables follow a separate path, close to
ground planes (this will reduce the influence of
electromagnetic interference on the remaining electric
cables);
− realize a single earth centre, preventing the earth
conductors from creating circular paths .
BRAHMA S.p.A.
Via del Pontiere, 31
37045 Legnago (VR)
Tel. +39 0442 635211 - Telefax +39 0442 25683 - 635256 00/02/08 Subject to amendments without notice
http://www.brahma.it
E-mail : brahma@brahma.it
4/4 AF099 rev.01

7 712
ISO 9001
QRA10... QRA53..., QRA55... with clamp QRA2... with clamp
Flame Detectors QRA...
The flame detectors are designed for use with Siemens burner controls, for the
supervision of gas and oil flames.
The QRA... and this Data Sheet are intended for use by OEMs which integrate the
flame detectors in their products.
Use
The flame detectors are used for the supervision of gas flames, yellow- or blue-burning
oil flames and for ignition spark proving.
Type reference For use with burner control type Operating mode
QRA2..., QRA10... LGB2... / LGB4... with AGQ1... Intermittent
LFL...
LFE1...
LFE10...
LMG... with AGQ2...
QRA53..., QRA55... LGK16... Continuous
LGI16...
CC1N7712en
Siemens Building Technologies
17.10.2001 HVAC Products
Warning notes
To avoid injury to persons, damage to property or the environment, the following

warning notes should be observed!
• Before performing any wiring changes in the connection area of the detector, com-
pletely isolate the equipment from the mains supply (all-polar disconnection)
• Ensure protection against electric shock hazard by providing adequate protection
for the terminals
• Check wiring and all safety functions
• Halogen lamps, welding equipment, special lamps or ignition sparks may produce
sufficient radiation for the detector’s UV cell to ignite. X-rays and gamma radiation
can also generate erroneous flame signals
Mounting notes
• Ensure that the relevant national safety regulations are complied with
Installation notes
• Installation work must be carried out by qualified staff

• Observe the permissible lengths of the detector cable (refer to «Technical data»)
• Always run the ignition cables separate while observing the greatest possible dis-
tance to the detector and to other cables
Electrical connection of the flame detector
It is important to achieve practically disturbance- and loss-free signal transmission:

• Never run the detector cable together with other cables
– Line capacitance reduces the magnitude of the flame signal
– Use a separate cable
2/8
Siemens Building Technologies CC1N7712en

HVAC Products 17.10.2001
Commissioning notes
• Commissioning and maintenance work must be carried out by qualified staff

• Trouble-free burner operation is ensured only when the intensity of UV radiation at
the detector’s location is high enough for the detector’s UV cell to ignite during
each half wave. The intensity of UV radiation at the detector’s location is checked
through measurement of the detector current
LFE10...
Measuring circuit for 9 10
QRA2..., QRA10... and bl sw AGQ1... / AGQ2...

QRA5...of the D-series
22 23 LGK16...
23 22 LFL1...
15 13 LFE1...
7712v01/1001
Legend 1) Connection of microammeter across adapter AGQ1... / AGQ2... and flame detector
A Incidence of radiation
M Microammeter (DC), internal resistance ≤ 5000 Ω
C Electrolytic capacitor 100...470 µF, DC 10...25 V
Measuring circuit for

QRA5... up to the QRA53 AGM19 LGK16...
C-series QRA55 - + LG I 16...
M KF8832 7712v03/9602
Minimum detector current values required:

Refer to the Data Sheet of the relevant burner control or to the Operating Instructions of
the KF8832.
Disposal notes
The flame detector contains electrical and electronic components and may not be dis-
posed of together with household garbage.
Local and currently valid legislation must be observed.
3/8

Mechanical design
Flame detectors Plastic housing, metalized to prevent static charging caused by the air flow from the
QRA2... fan. For direct mounting on the burner.
The detectors can be supplied with or without securing flange and clamp (refer to
«Type summary»).
Flame detectors Die-cast aluminium housing with a 1 in. mounting coupling (D) and a connection facility
QRA10... for cooling air.
The housing of this detector has a bayonet fitting which allows it to be secured either
directly to the mounting coupling or to the glass holder AGG06.
The mounting coupling can be screwed to a viewing tube or to the ball head AGG07.
The Pg cable gland can be removed and replaced, if some other detector cable shall be
used.
Flame detectors The detector’s UV cell is located behind a swivelling shutter at the front end of the de-
QRA5... tector tube which is flanged to the housing.
A quartz glass window protects the tube and the shutter against dirt.
The detector’s housing accommodates a stepper motor to drive the shutter and the
electronics to control the shutter.
Using the adapter AGG16.C, this flame detector can be mounted either directly on the
burner, on a viewing tube or on a combustion chamber viewing hole.
Plug AGM19 Plug AGM19 complete with cable for the connection of flame detectors QRA53... and
QRA55...
Adapter AGG16.C Adapter AGG16.C for QRA53..., QRA55..., made of die-cast aluminium with a 1 in.
mounting coupling.
The mounting coupling (D) is attached to the housing with a bayonet fitting.
QRA5...
AGG16...
AGG03 7712m08/0797
AGG06
AGG02
AGG06 QRA5... with AGG16.C and AGG06
AGG05
7712z05/0396
AGG07
Note:
AGG03 or AGG02 can also be fitted in the 1 in. mounting coupling (D) of the AGG16.C
(or QRA10...).
An adapter combination with glass holder AGG06, mounting coupling and ball joint for
QRA53..., QRA55... and QRA10... is possible.
4/8

Glass and quartz glass The glass and quartz glass lens holder AGG06 serves for holding the lens AGG03 and
lens holder AGG06 the heat insulation glass AGG02.
The lens is used to increase the sensitivity, and the heat insulation glass provides pro-
tection against high temperatures, thus extending the life of the UV cell.
The AGG06 also allows various combinations of lens, heat insulation glass and 1 in.
mounting coupling.
When using the lens and the heat insulation glass, the AGG06 with the lens must be
mounted as close as possible to the flame detector.
AGG16... AGG16...
AGG03! AGG02
AGG06 AGG06
AGG02 !
7712z06/0696
AGG03
7712z07/0396
AGG06 AGG06
Correct Wrong
AGG06 has a bayonet fitting with which it is attached either to the housing of adapter
AGG16.C or to the housing of flame detector QRA10... and the mounting coupling.
By undoing the bayonet fittings on both sides, the AGG06 glass holder(s) can be easily
detached from the combination of QRA10... or AGG16.C and QRA53..., QRA55....
This facilitates straightforward cleaning of the glass or lens without having to remove
them from the glass holder AGG06.
The intermediate rings are used for the smooth running of the bayonet fittings, espe-
cially where – after removal of the flame detector – the hole to the combustion cham-
ber serves as a viewing tube.
By fitting the intermediate ring to the appropriate bayonet connection, the combination
can be undone where required by rotating the housing of the QRA10... or AGG16.C
Quartz glass lens AGG03 with spring washer and O-ring for increasing the sensitivity.
AGG03
Heat insulation glass Heat insulation glass AGG02 with spring washer and O-ring, offering the same mount-
AGG02 ing choices as with the AGG03.
This heat insulation glass is required in applications where the temperature at the flame
detector exceeds 80 °C.
Mounting coupling (D) Using the bayonet fitting, the 1 in. mounting coupling can be attached either to the
AGG06, the AGG16.C or the flame detector QRA10....
The mounting coupling is supplied with the QRA10... or AGG16.C.
Nipple AGG05 1 in. nipple AGG05 for connecting the mounting coupling (D) to the ball head AGG07.
Ball head AGG07 Ball head with 1 in. internal thread.

For use with the 1 in. mounting coupling and the AGG06.
The AGG07 is used for mounting on a rigid surface, such as the boiler wall.
It facilitates optimum adjustment of the viewing angle.
5/8

Type summary
Flame detectors Type reference Sensitivity Flange and Terminal cover Spare UV tube
clamp
QRA2 without
QRA2(1) normal with black 4 502 1131 0
QRA2.9 ²) without
QRA2.9(1) ²) with
QRA2M high without green 4 502 4065 7
QRA2M(1) with
QRA10.C normal --- --- 4 502 1131 0
QRA10M.C high 4 502 4065 7
Type reference Sensitivity Detector tube Mains voltage Spare UV tube

length
QRA53.C27 normal AC 220...240 V
QRA53.C17 125 mm AC 100...110 V
QRA53.D27 high AC 220...240 V
QRA53.D17 AC 100...110 V 4 502 4065 7
QRA55.C27 normal AC 220...240 V
QRA55.C17 77 mm AC 100...110 V
QRA55.D27 high AC 220...240 V
QRA55.D17 AC 100...110 V
Note All QRA5... are delivered complete with clamp. Use of the detector requires a connect-
ing cable AGM19 (refer to «Accessories» for QRA5...).
Accessories for QRA2... Part For use with Part number

and QRA5... when Flange ³) rounded QRA2... 4 241 8855 0
ordered as single items Flange straight QRA2... 4 241 8898 0
Clamp ³) QRA2... 4 199 8806 0
Clamp for direct mounting 4) QRA5... 4 199 1034 0
Accessories for QRA5... Type Description

reference
AGG16.C Adapter for QRA53... and QRA55...
AGM19 Plug complete with 2 m cable for QRA53... and QRA55...
KF8832 Unit for measuring the detector current with QRA53... and QRA55...,
recommended for use with detector types up to the C-series
Accessories for Type reference Description

QRA10... and AGG16.C AGG02 Heat insulation glass with spring washer and O-ring
AGG03 1) Quartz glass lens with spring washer and O-ring
AGG05 1 in. nipple
AGG06 Glass and quartz glass lens holder with intermediate ring
AGG07 Ball head with 1 in. internal thread
AGG16.C KF8832 AGM19 AGG05 AGG06 with AGG07

intermediate ring
Legend 1) For detectors of the B-series, lens AGG01 is available

2) With heat-resistant housing for ambient temperatures up to 200 °C (short-time, up to a few seconds)
3) Supplied with QRA2...(1) types
4) Supplied with QRA5... types
6/8

Ordering
When ordering, please give type references according to «Type summary».
Technical data
General detector data Average life of UV cell approx. 10,000 hours at max. 50 °C,
higher ambient temperatures reduce con-
siderably the cell’s life
Perm. combustion chamber pressure
- QRA10... max. 50 mbar
- QRA10... + AGG03 or AGG02 max. 500 mbar
Degree of protection
- QRA2... IP 40
- QRA10... IP 54
- QRA53..., QRA55... IP 54
Mounting position optional
Weight
- AGG01 approx. 10 g
- AGG16.C approx. 650 g
- QRA2... approx. 60 g
- QRA10... approx. 740 g
- QRA10... + AGG03 approx. 750 g
- QRA53..., QRA55... approx. 900 g
Environmental Transport IEC 721-3-2

conditions Climatic conditions class 2K2
Mechanical conditions class 2M2
Temperature range -20...+60 °C
Humidity < 95 % r.h.
Operation IEC 721-3-3
Climatic conditions class 3K5
Condensation, formation of ice and ingress of water are not permitted!
Function
With this type of flame supervision, the UV radiation emitted by gas or oil flames is
used to generate the flame signal.
The radiation detector consists of a UV-sensitive cell with 2 electrodes, which ignite
when illuminated with radiation in the 190...270 nm range of the spectrum, thereby
triggering a current in the flame detector circuit.
The UV cell does not respond to glowing firebrick in the combustion chamber, daylight
or light from the boiler room illumination.
7/8

Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
QRA2... QRA10... AGG02
97 87 22,8
10
25...50 2,5
30
M4
SW20
52
18
66
22,5
48
SW22
18
120
7712m07/0597
''
7712M04
8
3
QRA5...
R1 ''
7712m02/0997
UV
Pg13,5
65
4 241 88550 QRA5... with AGG05, AGG06, AGG07, AGG16.C and AGM19 AGG03
36 22,8
24.
3
R2 R4
7
R0.3
R2
30
25°
15
3
7712m09e/1001
7712M03
Company logo to 3 10 18
LN 3 8380 0102
0.2 mm elevated 24 D
48
4 241 8898 0
36
18
R4
7
25°
30
15
7712m01/0797
3
7712m10e/1001
Company logo to 3 10 24
LN 3 8380 0102
0.2 mm elevated 48
Incidence of radiation Clamp for direct mounting on the burner or the AGG16.C
2001 Siemens Building Technologies AG

8/8 Subject to change
7 631
ISO 9001
VGD20... VGD40...
Double Gas Valves VGD20...

VGD40...
Double gas valves for use on gas trains, consisting of 2 safety shut-off valves of
class A.
Suited for use with gases of gas families I...III.
The double gas valve is to be combined with 2 actuators of the SKP… line (e.g. to
provide the functions of 2 safety shut-off valves in series, complete with gas
pressure governor).
The VGD20... / VGD40... and this Data Sheet are intended for use by OEMs which
integrate the double gas valves in their products.
Use
The double gas valves are used primarily on gas trains for burners.
In combination with appropriate SKP… actuators, the valve also serves as a:

- shut-off valve (in connection with SKP10...)
- control valve with shut-off function (in connection with SKP20..., SKP27..., SKP50...
or SKP70...).
For description and function of the SKP... actuators, refer to the relevant Data Sheets:
SKP10... / SKP20... Data Sheet 7641
SKP11... Data Sheet 7639
CC1N7631en
22.02.2001 Landis & Staefa Division
Warning notes
To avoid injury to persons, damage to property or the environment, the following

warning notes should be observed!
It is not permitted to open, interfere with or modify the double gas valve VGD40....
Fall or shock can adversely affect the safety functions. Such valves may not be put into
operation, even if they do not exhibit any damage.
Mounting notes
• The relevant national safety regulations must be complied with

• The double gas valve can be mounted either vertically or horizontally (spring
housing either horizontally or pointing downward)
• The direction of gas flow must be in accordance with the arrow on the valve body
When used in combination with the SKP20..., SKP27..., SKP50... or SKP70...

actuator, the minimum gas pressure switch must always be mounted up-
stream of the double gas valve!
VGD20... • The electrohydraulic SKP10... actuator, which is used for shut-off functions, must
always be mounted on the inlet side while the actuators with integrated governor
(SKP20..., SKP27..., SKP50... or SKP70...) must always be mounted on the outlet
side of the valve (with a contoured disk)
• To mount the double gas valve, 2 flanges type AGA41... / AGA51... are required
• To prevent cuttings from getting inside the valve, first mount the flanges to the
piping and then clean the associated parts
• Ensure that the O-rings are fitted between the flanges and the valve body
VGD40... • Ensure that the gaskets are fitted between the flanges
• Check to ensure the bolts on the flanges are properly tightened
• Check to ensure the connections with all components are tight
Installation notes
Installation work must be carried out by qualified staff.
Commissioning notes
Commissioning work must be carried out by qualified staff.
Disposal
The unit contains hydraulic oil, it is not allowed throwing into household garbage.
Pay attention to the local and actualize law.
2/10

Landis & Staefa Division 22.02.2001
Mechanical design
VGD20... The double gas valves VGD20... are of the normally closed type and have 2 disks, one
non-contoured disk on the inlet side and one contoured disk on the outlet side.
The stems are guided on both sides of the disks, thus ensuring precise alignment and
tight shut-off. The closing force of the return spring is supported by the prevailing gas
pressure (class A to EN 161). A removable strainer on the inlet side protects the valve
and downstream controls against dirt. Valve body and connecting flanges are made of
die-cast aluminium, the seals of nitril rubber, and the stems of stainless steel. The double
gas valves feature a pilot gas connection Rp¾" (refer to «Type summary» and «Dimen-
sions»). Gas valve, flanges and actuators are supplied as separate items. No special
tools are required for assembly.
Connecting flanges The connecting flanges are provided with a test point.
AGA41 / AGA51 for They are internally threaded and supplied as separate items, together with the neces-
VGD20... sary accessories, such as bolts, nuts, seals, etc.
The overall flange dimensions and bore-holes are identical so that all types of flanges
can be fitted to the valve body, irrespective of their nominal size.
This means that a 1½" flange can be fitted to a 2" VGD... valve, and vice versa.
Each double gas valve requires 2 connecting flanges, which are to be ordered as sepa-
rate items.
Sectional view of VGD20...
V1 V2
Connecting flange
Profiled valve disk
7631z03e/0101
Application example
VGD20... with SKP10... and SKP70... (mounted on «V2»)
3/10

VGD40... The VGD40... double gas valves are double seat disk valves of the normally closed
type.
The stems are guided on both sides. The patented double seats are closed by 2
springs. The spring of each stem exerts a pressure on the disk so that there is a de-
fined closing force acting on each disk. The surface area proportions of the 2 valve
disks per stem are such that the closing force increases as the inlet pressure increases
(class A valve to EN 161).
A removable strainer on the inlet side protects the valve and downstream controls
against dirt.
The double gas valves DN65…150 correspond to the standard valve sizes of single
valves (conforming to EN 558).
Sectional view of VGD40...
V1 V2
7631z02/1100
The VGD40... are supplied with a pilot gas flange having a ¾“ connection for the pilot
gas line and a ¼“ connection for an impulse line.
This impulse line connection between the 2 valves and another impulse line connection
on the outlet flange can be connected directly to the SKP20… constant pressure gov-
ernor fitted to «V1» or «V2».
A universal mounting plate facilitates attachment of a number of commercially available
pressure switches or valves proving devices.
Both the pilot gas flange and the universal mounting plate are exchangeable and can
be fitted on either side of the valve.
Application example
VGD40.080 with SKP10... and SKP20... (mounted on «V2»).
4/10

Type summary
Double gas valves DN Flow rate at Type reference

∆p = 10 mbar m³ / h air¹)
1 ½“ 85 VGD20.403
2“ 100 VGD20.503
40 85 VGD40.040
50 100 VGD40.050
65 160 VGD40.065
80 250 VGD40.080
100 400 VGD40.100
125 580 (630 ²)) VGD40.125
150 700 (800 ²)) VGD40.150
¹) Flow rate to EN 161
2) Flow rate with future SKP...line (available from 2002)
Flanges For use with VGD20... with test point Rp ¼“

(to be ordered as separate items)
Type DN 1) For double gas valve
AGA41 1 ½“ VGD20.403
AGA51 2“ VGD20.503
1) Internally threaded to ISO R 7/1
Service replacement Consisting of:

sets Stems, disks, strainer and screws, washers and seals:
(for VGD20... only) For double gas valve Part number
VGD20.40... 4 679 1550 0
VGD20.50... 4 679 1550 0
Ordering
VGD20... only When ordering, please give type references of double gas valve and flanges.
Example:
Double gas valve 2“ with 2 connecting flanges
1 VGD20.503
2 AGA51
The SKP... actuators are to be ordered as separate items.
VGD40... only When ordering, please give type reference of double gas valve.
Example:
Double gas valve DN80
1 VGD40.080
The 2 lateral mounting plates for the pilot gas connection and a universal adapter plate
are included and ready fitted.
The SKP... actuators are to be ordered as separate items.
5/10

Technical data
General data Class A (EN 161)

Group 2 (EN 161)
Types of gases gas families I, II, III (to G260 of DVGW)
air
Built-in strainer, mesh size 0.9 mm
Flow rates refer to «Flow chart»
Perm. medium temperature -15...+60 °C
Mounting spring housing horizontal or vertical, point-
ing downward
Flanges VGD40... to ISO 7005; PN16
Materials
- VGD20... die-cast aluminium
- VGD40... sand-cast aluminium
Net weight
- VGD... refer to the table below
- AGA41 approx. 266 g
- AGA51 approx. 264 g
Max. permissible operating pressure:

Double gas Static pressure / mbar Dynamic / mbar Weight Volume
valve (with double gas valves (approx.) between
closed) V1 / V2
(dm³)
VGD20.403 600 3.2 kg 0.75
VGD20.503 600 3.15 kg 0.8
VGD40.040 1000 7 kg 0.8
VGD40.050 1000 7,2 kg 0.8
VGD40.065 1200 700 8.4 kg 1.3
VGD40.080 700 9.6 kg 1.53
VGD40.100 700 12.9 kg 3
VGD40.125 700 18.2 kg 5.175
VGD40.150 700 24.1 kg 8.7
Environmental Transport IEC 721-3-2

Operation IEC 721-3-3
6/10

Function
VGD20... / VGD40...
Simplified sizing VGD... with SKP70...

example
Prerequisites Gas outlet of burner toward combustion
chamber
Simplified example
Combustion chamber = 0 mbar
pressure constant
Required control ratio RV = 4:1
Gas inlet pressure 20 mbar
1. Nominal load
Burner pressure at nominal load 16 mbar
Volumetric flow at nominal load 200 m³ / h natural gas, corresponding to 156 m³
/h air
- ∆pVGD40.080 at nominal load 20-16 = 4 mbar
→ Point «PA» in the chart
Point «PA» placed on the characteristic line or on the right side of the characteris-
tic line.
2. Low-flame
PG max 16 mbar
PG min = = = 1 mbar
2
RV 16
VGas max 200 m 3 / h
VG min = = = 50 m 3 correspond ing to h = 39 m 3 / h air
RV 4
→ Point «PB» in the chart
- Selected valve size: VGD40.080
Point «PB» placed on the characteristic line or on the left side of the characteristic
line.
Conversion of air volume to a corresponding gas volume (natural gas)
Basis for scale Abscissa Medium Density ratio dv Conversion factor

volumetric flow to air 1
f =
QG in m³ / h dv
1 Natural gas 0.61 1.28
2 Propane 1.562 0.8
3 Town gas 0.46 1.47
4 Air 1 1
Conversion to air (m³ / h) from other types of gases:
QG
QL =
f
QL = air volume in m³ / h that produces the same pressure drop as «QG».
7/10

Sizing flow chart for VGD...
m /h
3
VGD40.150*
VGD40.150
VGD40.125*
VGD40.125
VGD40.100
VGD40.080
VGD40.065
VGD40.050 / VGD20.503
VGD40.040 / VGD20.403
x
PA
VDG40.150
VGD40.125
VGD40.100
VGD40.080
VGD40.065
PB
x
VGD40.050 / VGD20.503
VGD40.040 / VGD20.403
Minimum flow
Maximum flow
(valve fully open)
Points "PA / PB", refer to chapter Function "Simplified sizing example"
PA / PB = Operating points
8/10

Combinations of VGD40... and actuator (here with SKP10... and SKP20...)
Valve proving device "A" and pressure switch (P i)

Pi
Valve proving device "A"

PM
Valve proving device "A" and pressure switch (P i)
Valve proving device "A"
100 2
92,5
57
7631m07e/0201
2 pressure switches (PM, Pi)
61
30
107
310
210,2
Ancillary units
453
Legend
Pi Inlet pressure upstream of valve 1
P M Intermediate chamber pressure upstream of valve 2
9/10

Dimensions
VGD20... SKP... C SKP...

19 50 63,5 63,5 50 19
B Rp1/4" G3/4" B
Rp1/4"
AGA41 or AGA51
61
SW80
DN
19,5
103
10
11/2": 22,5
AGA41 or AGA51
2": 27,5
A
265
30
7631m05e/0101
VGD40...
Rp 1/4
F G 3/4" Rp 1/4
E
M
B
P
G
D
K C
L
A
Pressure switch plate
Pressure switch plate
Rp 1/8
Pm
Q
58
Pm
2
J
I
22
22
Pi
2
16
17
11
5
Pilot gas connection

7631m02e/0101
7
Pm
Rp 1/8
Pi
36
54
Dimensions
Type reference DN A B C D E F G I J K L M P Q
VGD40.040 40 240 195 168 115 58 88 110 77 79 20 50 2 19 70
VGD40.050 50 240 202 174 115 58 88 125 77 79 20 50 2 19 70
VGD40.065 65 290 215 194 118 60 102 145 87 90 30 60 4 19 81
VGD40.080 80 310 236 204 132 54 107 160 90 92 30 60 2 19 88
VGD40.100 100 350 259 227 145 43 131 180 105 108 41 71 13 19 99
VGD40.125 125 400 305 255 175 31 150 210 119 122 41 71 25 19 113
VGD40.150 150 480 335 293 188 20 168 240 140 143 39 69 36 23 134
2001 Siemens Landis & Staefa Produktion GmbH

10/10

Landis & Staefa Division Subject to alteration 22.02.2001
7 643
SKP15... SKP25... / SKL25… SKP55... SKP75...
Actuators for SKPx5...

Gas Valves SKL25…
• ON / OFF safety shutoff feature conforming to EN 161 in connection with
SKPx5… actuators and gas valves from Siemens
• Damped opening (rapid closing)
• Very low power consumption
• Suitable for gases of gas families I...III
• Optionally with / without end switch (factory set)
• Plug-in connection facility
• Electrical indication of operation
• Stroke indication
• Supplementary Data Sheets (refer to the Data Sheets on gas and air valves)
The SKPx5... / SKL25… and this Data Sheet are intended for use by OEMs which
integrate the actuators in their products.
CC1N7643en
Building Technologies
Use
SKP... actuators are designed for use with the following types of valves:
Type of valve Medium Data Sheet
VGG... Natural gas N7636
VGF... Gases of gas families I...III
VGH...
VGD2... Natural gas N7631
VGD4... Gases of gas families I...III
VRF... Biogas N7633
VRH... (used with SKPx5...,
on request)
VLF... Hot air N7637
Actuators in general The combination of actuator and valve provides the following functions:
- Safety shutoff valve (SKP15...)
- Safety shutoff valve with gas pressure governor / controller (SKP25..., SKP55...,
and SKP75...)
The electrohydraulic actuators together with the valves are designed for use with gases
of gas families I...III and air. They are used primarily on gas-fired combustion plant. The
actuators open slowly and close rapidly. They can be combined with any of the above
mentioned valve types and nominal valve sizes. The actuator can be supplied with end
switch (for indicating the fully closed position). For information about valve sizing, refer
to the «Valve sizing chart» in the Data Sheet of the relevant valve.
SKP25... The SKP25... operates as a constant pressure governor with a setpoint spring.
Its field of use is primarily forced draft gas burners

- with mechanical air / fuel ratio control
- with electronic air / fuel ratio control
SKP25.7... The SKP25.7... operates like the SKP25... constant pressure governor, but features
electric adjustment of the setpoint spring.
Its field of use is primarily

- atmospheric burners in modulating or multistage operation
- individual burners or groups of burners on industrial furnaces
- plant with remote control of the air ratio with burners using a direct mechanical link
SKL25... The SKL25... actuators are of the same design as the SKP25…, but close more slowly
(in 3…6 seconds).
The SKL25… do not conform to the standards for gas applications and, for this reason,
are only suited for use with air.
SKP55... The SKP55... operates as a differential pressure governor.
Its field of use is predominently

- combustion plant with combined heat recovery systems
- plant where pressure conditions in the burner and combustion chamber do not
change in proportion to load changes
- burners with adjustable air / fuel mixing devices in the burner head
- plant with negative pressure levels on the gas or air side
SKP75... The SKP75... operates as a pressure ratio controller and provides control of the gas
pressure depending on the pressure of the combustion air, ensuring that the gas / air
ratio remains constant across the entire load range.
Its field of use is primarily modulating forced draft gas burners.
2/30
Building Technologies CC1N7643en

Warning notes
To prevent injury to persons, damage to property or the environment, the follow-
ing warning notes should be observed!
Do not open, interfere with or modify the actuators!
• All activities (mounting, installation and service work, etc.) must be performed by
qualified staff
• Check to ensure that the impulse pipes are properly fitted and tight
• Fall or shock can adversely affect the safety functions. Such actuators must not be
put into operation, even if they do not exhibit any damage
• Each time work has been carried out (mounting, installation, service work, etc.),
check to ensure that wiring is in an orderly state and make the safety checks as
described in «Commissioning notes
• If mains voltage is fed to the end switch via the second plug-in space, protective
earth must be connected to the actuator via the same plug
• Use of connectors conforming to DIN EN 175301-803-A is mandatory
• The connectors used must feature cable strain relief
• The pump’s stem must not be pulled
out using the overstroke element
since that part could become loose
7643z17e/0404
Do not pull here!
SKP15... / SKP25... SKP15... SKP25...

with connecting cable
AGA62.000A000
Position Position
valve1 valve 2
7643z28e/1203
VGD40...
Plug-in space without collar

(end switch / CPI)
AGA64 AGA65
For connection of end switch,

a connector with collar should be used
(protection against electric shock hazard),
refer to "Accessories"!
Plug-in space with collar

(power supply) 7643z14e/0105
3/30

Engineering notes
Design of the If the available gas pressure exceeds the maximum permissible operating pressure of
gas train the valve / actuator (refer to the Data Sheet of the relevant valve), it must be lowered by
an upstream pressure controller. The pressure switch for lack of gas must always be
fitted upstream of the gas valve when used in connection with the actuator. The inside
diameter of the impulse pipes must be a minimum of 6 mm.
SKP25..., SKL25…, The impulse pipes must be installed such that the differential pressure can be acquired
SKP55..., SKP75... with no disturbance (unfavorable flow conditions). Pressure test points must not pro-
trude and be flush with the inside diameter of the pipe or duct wall. The impulse lines to
the governor / controller should be as short as possible, enabling the governor / control-
ler to respond quickly should sudden load changes occur.
SKP75... • Installation of impulse pipes

In the case of unsafe combustion chamber pressure pipes (e.g. resulting from po-
tential leaks); the setting must also be checked during operation without having the
combustion chamber pipe connected, especially with respect to maximum burner
capacity. The impulse pipes must be fitted such that the differential pressure can
be acquired with no disturbance. With gas / air ratios > 3, the impulse pipes for the
combustion air and the combustion chamber pressure must have an inside diame-
ter of at least 8 mm. The impulse pipe for the combustion chamber pressure must
be fitted such that the gases will cool down in the vicinity of the impulse pipe and
condensing gases cannot enter the controller but will return to the combustion
chamber.
Recommendations:
– The gas pressure should be acquired at a distance of 5 times the nominal pipe
size downstream from the valve
– Do not use the lateral test points on the valve body for picking up the pressure
• Considering the combustion chamber pressure

If the resistance value of the combustion chamber / heat exchanger / stack system
is constant, the combustion chamber pressure changes in proportion to the gas
and combustion air pressure as the burner’s output changes. In that case, the
combustion chamber pressure need not be fed to the SKP75... as a disturbance
variable. However, if the combustion chamber pressure does not change to the
same extent as the gas and air pressure – as this is the case in plants with flue gas
fan or modulating flue gas damper – the combustion chamber pressure must be
fed to the SKP75... as a disturbance variable, enabling the controller to counteract.
Mounting notes
• Ensure that the relevant national safety regulations are complied with
• The quadratic arrangement of the fixing holes allows the actuator to be fitted in 4
different positions, each step being 90°
• The actuator can be mounted or replaced while the system is under pressure; seal-
ing materials are not required
• Follow the Mounting Instructions included with the actuators:
- For SKP15...: M7643
- For SKP25...: M7643.1
- For SKL25…: M7643
- For SKP25.7…: M7644
• - For SKP55...: M7643.2
- For SKP75...: M7643.3
4/30

Installation and commissioning notes
Actuators in general • Electrical commissioning may only be performed when the actuator is fitted to the
valve; otherwise, the actuator can be damaged
• Power is supplied and connection of the end switch is made directly via a connect-
ing cable (conforming to DIN EN 175301-803-A)
• The end switch is factory-set
Functioning principle When power is applied, the pump will be activated and the control valve closed. Oil is
of 1-stage actuator with now pumped from the chamber below the piston to the pressure chamber above the
safety shutoff feature piston. The oil pressure causes the piston to move downward, thereby opening the
valve – against the pressure of the closing spring. The pump remains energized until
the closing command is given. When power is removed, or in the event of a power
failure, the pump will be deactivated and the control valve opened so that the closing
spring pushes the piston back. The return flow system is sized such that the counter-
stroke required for reaching the fully closed position is completed within about 0.6 sec-
onds.
) For 2-stage actuators, refer to Data Sheet N7641.
SKP15... complete (Schematic drawing)

with valve
4 Legend
1 Piston
1 2 Oscillating pump
SKP15...
3 Oil reservoir
2
4 Pressure chamber
7 5 Stem
6 Closing spring
7 Control valve
8 End switch (optional)
3
5
8
7643z29/0304
VG.../VL.../VR...
pE
5/30

Installation and commissioning notes (cont´d)
SKP2..., SKP5... and SKP7... control a bypass valve via their pneumatic controller,
thereby opening the gas valve.
with valve
Damping AGA25 Legend
(optional)
4 1 Piston
PGas 2 Oscillating pump
Air
Only SKP25.3...: 3 Oil reservoir
Air connection PL 1 4 Pressure chamber
5 Stem
6 Valve´s closing spring
10 7 Control valve
9 2 9 Spring (setpoint adjustment)
10 Bypass valve
SKP25.... 7
5
8
> 6 mm
VG.../VL.../VR...
min. 5d
pE
7643z30e/1204
SKP25... The setpoint adjustment «PGas» must be made manually by turning the adjusting
screw, which acts on the setpoint spring (for setpoint springs, refer to «Accessories»).
PGas Legend
Pe Inlet pressure
V Volumetric flow
PGas 0...22 mbar (with AGA29
standard spring),
t (Pe; V) presetting 15 mbar
7643d03/0503
SKP25.3... The SKP25.3... operates based on the zero governor principle (PL : PG = 1:1).
By feeding fan pressure «PL» to the air inlet, the gas pressure «PGas» follows with a
fixed 1-to-1 ratio.
PGas A Gas / air ratio for stoichiometric
C
combustion
A B At low-fire, the parallel displace-
ment of the working characteri-
B stic produces a larger amount of
excess air in percent. The zero
governor makes possible a parallel
PGas + displacement in both directions,
- 1 mbar
towards «Excess air» B and
«Lack of air» C
PAir
7643d04e/0105
6/30

SKP25.4... The SKP25.4... is suited for the control of higher pressures.
Standard spring 0...1,500 mbar.
SKP25.4... complete (Schematic drawing)

with valve
PGas 4 Legend
1 Piston
Luft / Air
3 Oil reservoir
10 4 Pressure side
9 5 Stem
2 6 Valve´s closing spring
7 7 Control valve
SKP25.4....
3 9 Spring (setpoint adjustment)
10 Bypass valve
5
8
> 6 mm
VG.../VL.../VR...
min. 5d
pE
7643z34/1204
SKP25.4... Setpoint adjustment «PGas» is made manually by turning the adjusting screw, which
acts on the setpoint spring (for setpoint springs, also refer to «Accessories»).
PGas Legend
Pe Inlet pressure
V Volumetric flow
PGas 0...1,500 mbar
t (Pe; V) (with built-in standard
7643d09/1204
spring AGA23), presetting
1,200 mbar
SKL25... Setpoint adjustment «PGas» is made manually by turning the adjusting screw, which
acts on the setpoint spring (for setpoint springs, also refer to «Accessories»).
PGas Legend
Pe Inlet pressure
V Volumetric flow
PGas 15…120 mbar
t (Pe; V) (with AGA29 standard
7643d09/1204
spring), presetting 15 mbar
7/30

SKP25.7...
Functioning principle of gas pressure governor with SQS37 motorized setpoint adjuster:
pa On the gas outlet side, the gas pressure governor maintains

the pressure at the required setpoint.
The electrical signal fed to the SQS37 motorized setpoint ad-
juster changes the preadjusted setpoint in proportion to the
Wo length of the electrical pulse, either increasing or decreasing,
Wom
depending on the direction of the pulse signal.

Wo
Wu
When the preset maximum or minimum setpoint is reached,
the outlet pressure will remain at a constant level.
The time required to traverse the upper setpoint range «∆wo»
is the same in both directions.
Wu
The running time «t∆wo» changes in proportion to the change

of the upper setpoint range «∆wo».
7643d05/0503 t Wo
t At the lower setpoint limitation «∆wu», the SQS37 runs idle
t Wo
during the period of time «∆t∆wo», which means that a certain
part of it can occur as dead time.
t Wom
SKP25.7... complete (Schematic drawing)

with valve
Legend
SQS37...
9 PGas 4
1 Piston
2 Oscillating pump
3 Oil reservoir
1
4 Pressure side
5 Stem
10 6 Valve’s closing spring
7 Control valve
2 8 End switch (optional)
7 9 Position indication
10 Bypass valve
3
SKP25.7...
5
8
> 6 mm
VG.../VL.../VR...
min. 5d
pE
7643z31/0805
8/30

Setpoint springs Delivery ex works for the following setpoint ranges:
for SKP25.7... ∆wu 0.5...4 mbar ±15 %
∆wo 0...18 mbar ±15 %
For springs required for other pressure ranges, please refer to the following table.
Setpoint ranges other than the standard range can be selected by changing the
springs. Each SKP25.7... is supplied with 7 additional springs in a plastic bag, which
can be fitted on site, if required.
Spring ∆wo Spring ∆wu

Color dia. [mm] mbar ±15 % Color dia. [mm] mbar ±15 %
White 7 0...10 Steel-colored * 12 0.5...4
Steel-colored * 7 0...18 Green 12 2...15
Red 7.5 0...45 Yellow 12.5 15...120
Green 8 0...90 Red 12.5 100...250
Blue 13 10...30
* The steel-colored springs are fitted in the SKP25.7...
Setpoint springs for ∆wo cannot be used for ∆wu, and vice versa (refer to spring dia. in
the table). All combinations of ∆wo and ∆wu are possible.
9/30


with valve
Legend
Luft / Air
PGas
1 Piston
2 Oscillating pump
4
3 Oil reservoir
4 Pressure chamber
1
5 Stem
9 7 Control valve
10 7 9 Spring (setpoint adjustment)
10 Bypass valve
SKP55... 3
8 5
> 6 mm
VG.../VL.../VR...
min. 5d
pE
7643z32/0304
6
VG / PG Example:
Adjusted gas / air ratio for burner operation
1+ with excess gas 1+ . The percentage of
excess air is constant across the entire
load range. Gas / air ratio adjustment with
the adjustable orifice on the gas side (see
position k).
9
1-
7643d01/1004
VL / PL
Legend VL Volumetric air flow

VG Volumetric gas flow
10/30

M pL A
Air
8
VL 11
SKP55.../V... 3 - +2
1 +
B B
7643z01e/1204
5+ - 4
Gas 7
10 VG
pG
9
Safety notes:
Air damper j / orifice 11 must always be located as shown, that is, orifice
11 must be installed downstream from the air damper j.
Gas valve 10 (VG...) / orifice k must always be located as shown, that is,
orifice k must be installed downstream from the gas valve 10 .
4 3 5 c Adjustment of parallel displace-
ment of working characteristic
7643z12/1204
* Check combustion values

with cap fitted
2
d Test point for air pressure (+)
e Test point for air pressure (-)

1
f Test point for gas pressure (-)
g Test point for gas pressure (+)
12
h Stroke indication
i Spring (parallel displacement)
j Actuating device (air)

6
k Orifice (gas)
10 10 Gas valve
11 Orifice (air)
12 Indication of operating state (LED)
Legend ∆pG Differential pressure across orifice on the gas side

∆pL Differential pressure across orifice on the air side
A Air heating coil (recuperator)
B Burner
M Actuator
11/30

• Adjustment of governor on modulating burners prior to startup:

- The adjusting screw c on the SKP55... should be set to a gas / air ratio curve
which passes through the neutral point. The SKP55... is supplied with that fac-
tory setting.
Adjustment in the field can be made as follows:
Note:
Fit cap again before measuring the combustion value and after the setting is
made.
Turn adjusting screw c in counterclockwise direction until spring i is com-
pletely loose. Shut off the gas supply upstream of the SKP55... Switch on the
SKP55... Turn adjusting screw c in clockwise direction until valve opens
- Bring the adjustable orifice k to the precalculated value. That value with the
same pressure differential on the air and gas side must lead to practically stoi-
chiometric combustion
- Start the burner and run it to about 90 % of the nominal load
- Measure the combustion quality and make adjustments of the flow rate with the
adjustable orifice k until optimum measured values are reached (fine adjust-
ment)
- Return to low-fire operation. Check the combustion and readjust if necessary
the position of the working characteristic with the setting screw c on the
SKP55... until optimum measured values are reached. Clockwise rotation →
more gas. Counterclockwise rotation → less gas, that is, parallel displacement
of the working characteristic towards lack of air or excess air
- Limit the air damper j for low-fire operation
- If a significant parallel displacement of the working characteristic was required,
the setting must be checked again at 90 % of the nominal load and then read-
justed, if required
- Run the burner to the predefined nominal load with the help of the air damper
j and limit the actuator position for that load
- Check the flue gas values at a few positions of the load range. Make readjust-
ments in the nominal load range with the adjustable orifice k, and in the low-
fire range with screw c on the governor of the SKP55...
12/30


with valve
Legend
PGas
1 Piston
Luft / Air
3 Oil reservoir
4 Pressure chamber
SKP75...
1
5 Stem
9
7 Control valve
7 9 Bypass valve
5
8
> 6 mm
VG.../VL.../VR...
min. 5d
pE
7643z33/1205
6
Adjustment of governor • Use setting screw c / «PGAS» / «PAIR» to set the gas / air ratio to the required
on modulating burners value (coarse setting) and the scale with setting screw d to zero (refer to
Fig. 7643z03)
• Start the burner and run it to about 90 % of the nominal load
• Measure the CO2 or O2 content of the flue gases and optimize the adjustment with
setting screw c / «PGAS» / «PAIR» (refer to Fig. 7643z03)
• Return to low-fire operation, check the CO2 or O2 content of the flue gases. If nec-
essary, readjust position of the working characteristic with setting screw d/
until optimum measured values are attained
• Limit the air damper position for low-fire operation
Meaning of setting screw markings:

+ more gas
- less gas
13/30

If a significant parallel displacement of the working characteristic was required to obtain

optimum CO2 or O2 values in low-fire operation, the adjustment of the pressure ratio at
nominal load or 90 % of the nominal load must be checked again and readjusted, if
required.
• Run the burner to the required output and limit the nominal load air damper position
• Check the flue gas values at various positions of the load range
If readjustments are required:

- Use setting screw c / «PGAS» / «PAIR» in the nominal load range
- Use setting screw d/ to make parallel displacements of the characteristic in
the flow-fire range
If the gas / air pressure ratio lies outside the setting range, an orifice in the gas or air
flow can be used to adjust the pressure at the test points on the burner side. Prerequi-
site is that there is a sufficient gas or air pressure reserve on the inlet side.
PGas
C
M B
~
pA A
pC
M B
C
pA
SKP75... 0,4
1 PLuft
9 7643d07/0503
-
2
+
pE pG
7643z03/0304
VG...
c Setting and display of the gas / air ratio

Setting and display of parallel displacement of the
d working characteristic
e Test point for combustion chamber pressure
f Test point for air pressure
g Test point for gas pressure
h Stroke indication
i Operation indicator (LED)
j Gas valve
14/30

Function If the air pressure exceeds the maximum value of
• 30 mbar with a PGas / PAir ratio of ≥ 2

• 50 mbar with a PGas / PAir ratio of ≤ 2
permitted for the governor, the pressure must be lowered with a reducing T-piece
AGA78 (also refer to «Technical data»).
P1 Example:
p1 = 70 mbar
130 D1 = 1.5 mm
120 D2 = 1.7 mm
110
m
100 2
m Wanted: Air pressure signal «p2» for
=
90 2 the SKP75...
;D
m p2 = 26 mbar
80 m mm
5
1, 1 ,7
70 = 2=
D1 m;
D
60 m
= 1,5
50 D1
7643d02/0503
40
30
20
10
10 20 30 P2
Air is continuously vented to atmosphere via orifice «D2». The pressure of the following
medium will be reduced via throttle «D1». The illustration below shows the correlations.
p1
AGA78
P1 D1 Burner
D1
M
P2 "Air"/SKP7...
p2
D2
7643z02e/1003
D2
The reducing T-piece AGA78 is supplied ready for mounting, with D1 = 1.5 mm and
D2 = 1.7 mm.
D2 with a diameter of 2 mm is included as a loose item.
15/30

Standards and certificates
ISO 9001: 2000 ISO 14001: 2004

Cert. 00739 Cert. 38233
For use in the U.S. / Canada, the valves carry type suffix «U» (see example) and are -listed.
Example: SKP25.003U1
In connection with Conformity to EEC directives

valves – Electromagnetic compatibility EMC (immunity) 89 / 336 / EEC
– Directive for gas appliances 90 / 396 / EEC
– Directive for pressure devices 93 / 23 / EC
Disposal notes
The actuator contains electrical and electronic components and hydraulic oil and must
not be disposed of together with domestic waste.
Local and currently valid legislation must be observed.
16/30

Type summary (other types of actuators on request)
The complete gas shutoff assembly or pressure governor / controller assembly consists
of actuator and valve.
SKP15... Mains voltage AC 100...110 V AC 220...240 V

1-stage opening and closing, without end switch SKP15.000E1 SKP15.000E2
1-stage opening and closing, with end switch SKP15.001E1 SKP15.001E2
SKP25... 1-stage opening and closing, without end switch, with SKP25.003E1 SKP25.003E2
pressure governor up to 22 mbar
1-stage opening and closing, with end switch, with pres- SKP25.001E1 SKP25.001E2
sure governor up to 22 mbar
1-stage opening and closing, without end switch, zero SKP25.303E1 SKP25.303E2
governor version
1-stage opening and closing, without end switch, with SKP25.403E1 SKP25.403E2
pressure governor up to 1,500 mbar, high-pressure ver-
sion
1-stage opening and closing, with end switch, with pres- SKP25.401E1 ¹) SKP25.401E2 ¹)
sure governor up to 1,500 mbar, high-pressure version
1-stage opening and closing, without end switch, for --- SKP25.703E2 ¹)
electric setpoint adjustment
1-stage opening and closing, with end switch, for electric --- SKP25.701E2 ¹)
setpoint adjustment
¹) On request
SKL25... 1-stage opening and closing, without end switch, with --- SKL25.003E2
pressure governor up to 22 mbar
1-stage opening and closing, with end switch, with pres- SKL25.001E1 SKL25.001E2
sure governor up to 22 mbar
differential pressure governor
1-stage opening and closing, with end switch, with differ- SKP55.001E1 SKP55.001E2
ential pressure governor
pressure ratio controller
1-stage opening and closing, with end switch, with pres- SKP75.001E1 SKP75.001E2
sure ratio controller
1-stage opening and closing, without end switch, with SKP75.503E1 SKP75.503E2
pressure ratio controller, with greater parallel displace-
ment
1-stage opening and closing, with end switch, with pres- SKP75.501E1 ---
sure ratio controller, with greater parallel displacement
17/30

Ordering examples
When ordering, please give the complete type reference of the actuator (refer to «Type
summary»). All products must be ordered as separate items.
Example of SKP15... Actuator

- On / off
- With end switch
- For AC 230 V / 50 Hz SKP15.001E2
Connector valve actuator (plug) AGA64
Connector end switch (plug) AGA65
The complete gas valve shutoff pressure governor assembly consists of actuator and
valve. Please order the required valves as separate items (refer to the relevant Data
Sheets). Actuator and valve are supplied unassembled. Assembly is very straightfor-
ward and preferably made on the burner.
Complete combination of actuator / valve consisting of:

- Gas valve
- SKP15.001E2 actuator
- Accessories
Example of SKP25... Gas pressure governor with safety shutoff feature:

- Without end switch SKP25.003E2
- For AC 230 V / 50 Hz
Connector valve actuator (plug) AGA64
Combination of gas pressure governor / valve consisting of:

- Gas valve (refer to Data Sheets N7636 and N7631)
- SKP25.003E2 actuator
- Accessories, e.g. AGA25 (damping throttle)
Accessories (not supplied as standard, to be ordered as separate items)
Heating element AGA63.5A27 refer to Data Sheet N7923

- For use at low ambient temperatures (< -10 °C)
Connecting cable with plugs AGA62.000A000

- For powering both actuators on the double valve (VGD...) with connector (AGA64)
Connector for valve actuator (power supply) AGA64

- Plug-in connector conforming to DIN EN 175301-803-A
- Triple pole +
- 6...9 mm dia. / max. 1.5 mm²
Connector for end switch AGA65

- Plug-in connector conforming to DIN EN 175301-803-A
- Triple pole +
- 4.5...11 mm dia. / max. 1.5 mm²
Motorized setpoint adjuster for use with SKP25.7... SQS37

- 35 s
- For 5.5 mm stroke
- Refer to Mounting Instructions M7643.3
- Refer to Data Sheet SQS35… N4573
18/30

Accessories (not supplied as standard, to be ordered as separate items)
Setpoint spring (yellow) for SKP25... AGA22

- Optional to standard spring AGA29
- 15...120 mbar
- Standard spring in SKP25.4... (0…700 mbar)
Setpoint spring (red) for SKP25... AGA23

- 100...250 mbar
- 0...1,500 mbar with SKP25.4... (optional to AGA22)
Setpoint spring (unpainted) for SKP25.3... and SKP55... AGA28

- ±1.5 mbar
Setpoint spring (unpainted) for SKP25... AGA29

- 0...22 mbar
Damping throttle for SKP25... AGA25

- Optional
Damping throttle for SKP55... AGA75

- Optional, pipe connection for 8 mm dia.
- Refer to Mounting Instructions 4 319 2078 0
Damping throttle for SKP55... AGA75E

- Optional
(Same as AGA75 but with ¼“ threaded connection on both sides)
Pressure reducing-T-piece for SKP75... AGA78

- Optional
Set of gaskets AGA66

- For use between actuator and valve
- Increases degree of protection from IP 54 to IP 65
- When using VGG…single valves, also observe Data Sheet N7636
- Refer to Mounting Instructions M7643.2
- On request
19/30

Technical data
General device data Mains voltage AC 220 V –15 %...AC 240 V +10 %
AC 100 V –15 %...AC 110 V +10 %
Mains frequency 50...60 Hz ±6 %
Power consumption max. 13.5 VA
End switch (if fitted) factory set as closed position switch
valve fully closed
- Switching capacity 4 (2 A, cosϕ = 0.3)
On time 100 %
Opening time for full stroke 6...10 s (depending on nominal valve size)
(longer opening times below 0 °C)
Opening speed (approx. 2 mm / s) lower opening speeds due to low ambient
temperatures can be compensated by
fitting an AGA63.5A27 heating element
Closing time
- SKP… < 0.8 s (in the event of power failure)
- SKL25… 3…6 s (depending on the type of valve)
Perm. mounting positions
7643z07/0603
always with the diaphragms in the vertical

position
Degree of protection IP 54
→ only ensured when central screw at the
connector is tightened
Stroke max. 26 mm (valve limits max. stroke)
Weight
- SKP15... approx. 1.1 kg
- SKP25.7… approx. 1.6 kg (without SQS37)
- SKL25… approx. 1.6 kg (without SQS37)
Perm. media depending on the type of valve
Medium inlet pressure «PE» depending on the type of valve
Perm. medium temperature depending on the type of valve
Flow rate depending on the type of valve
Perm. test pressure «PG» 1,000 mbar
Perm. underpressure «PG» 200 mbar
20/30

Technical data (cont´d)
Environmental Storage DIN EN 60 721-3-1

Transport DIN EN 60 721-3-2
Operation DIN EN 60 721-3-3
(longer opening times below 0 °C)
-20…+60 °C
(with heating element AGA63…)
SKP25... Setpoint range of outlet pressure 0.5...250 mbar

(3 setpoint springs, refer to «Accessories»)
Control class A to DIN EN 88
Setting range (setpoint) max. 250 mbar (gas pressure)
Control group III to DIN 3392
SKP25.3… Combustion air pressure max. 50 mbar

Zero governor to EN 12067-1
Compensating variable differential pressure of combustion air
≥ 0.5 mbar
Differential pressure ratio (gas / air) 1:1
Parallel displacement PGas ±1 mbar
SKP25.7... Setpoint ranges ∆wo / ∆wu refer to «Function diagram»

Temperature range in operation -5…+50 °C (limited by SQS37)
SKP55... Differential pressure ratio (gas / air) 1:1

Perm. differential pressure the controller ∆ 0.3...200 mbar
may be subjected to during operation
Control accuracy < 10 % at «∆pmin»
< 1 % at «∆pmax»
Parallel displacement of working
characteristic
- Excess gas 1 mbar
- Excess air 1 mbar
Compensating variable differential pressure of combustion air
≥ 0.3 mbar
Interval required for load change via air min. 5 s (depending on valve stroke)
damper, from high-fire to low-fire
21/30

Technical data (cont´d)
SKP75... Control accuracy < 10 % at «∆pmin»

< 2 % at «∆pmax»
Control group III to DIN 3392
Control variable «Gas pressure» differential pressure «PG-PF» or «PG-PAir»
min. 0.8 mbar
max. 120 mbar
Control class A to DIN EN 88
Compensating variable combustion air;
when connecting combustion chamber
pressure, differential pressure of «Pair –
Pcombustion chamber» > 0.5 mbar
Air pressure at «PGas/PAir»
-≥2 max. 30 mbar
-≤2 max. 50 mbar
- for higher pressures, see AGA78 max. 150 mbar
(accessory)
Setting range pressure ratio refer to «Type summary»
- «Pgas / PAir» 0.4...9
Parallel displacement of working
characteristic
- Excess gas 1 mbar
- Excess air 1 mbar
- Excess with SKP75.5... 4.5 mbar
Perm. combustion chamber pressure depending on the controlled variable gas
pressure «PG»
Recommended distance impulse pipe con- min. 5 x nominal valve size at a location
nection from valve where there is no turbulence
Inlet pressure same as valve
Perm. test pressure «PG» 1 bar
Perm. underpressure «PG» 200 mbar
Interval required for load change via air min. 5 s (depending on valve stroke)
damper, from high-fire to low-fire
Motorized setpoint Mains voltage (control voltage) AC 230 V +10 % / -15 %

adjuster SQS27... Mains frequency 50...60 Hz ±6 %
Power consumption 2.5 VA
Running time ∆t∆wom 5.5 mm / 35 s
Degree of protection IP 54
Safety class III to VDE 0631
Environmental Storage DIN EN 60 721-3-1

Humidity < 95 % r.F.
Transport DIN EN 60 721-3-2
Operation DIN EN 60 721-3-3
22/30

Contact assignment device connector
7643z10/0903
1 2
3
3
2
← Valve closed
1
Valve actuator End switch
Connector AGA64 Connector AGA65
DIN EN 175301-803-A DIN EN 175301-803-A
double pole + triple pole +
Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
SKP15.000... actuators
188
7643m12e/1005
Hexagon socket A/F4

83
9
15.8
M5 18.3
30.5
Device connector Detail X

valve actuator to
74
87
DIN EN 175301-803
design A, double pole +
74
9
86
64
M3 Tightening torque
18 central fixing screw 0.4 Nm
23/30

Dimensions (cont´d)
Dimensions in mm
Actuator SKP15.001...
188
7643m02e/1204
Hexagon socket A/F4

83
9
15.8
M5 18.3
30.5

valve actuator to
Device connector end switch to
74
87
DIN EN 175301-803
design A, double pole + DIN EN 175301-803
design A, triple pole
74
9
86
64
24/30

Dimensions in mm
Actuators SKP25.0... /
SKP25.3... / SKL25…
96.2
32.5
Rp1/4
Rp1/4
Pressure nozzle
221
202
200
X
188
168
83
Hexagon socket A/F4
9
7643m08e/1005
15.8
M5
86 18.3
64
74 30.5
Device connector 6.3
valve actuator to Detail X
DIN EN 175301-803
design A, double pole + Only SKP25.001... /
SKL25.001...
Device connector
106
87
74
end shwitch to
DIN EN 175301-803
design A, triple pole +
9
9
4.8
98
141 Tightening torque
central fixing screw 0.4 Nm
M3
18
25/30

Dimensions in mm
Actuators SKP25.4...
71.7
32.5 Rp1/4
Rp1/4
Pressure nozzle
221
207
202
188
168
Hexagon socket A/F4
83
7643m07e/1005
9
M5 15.8
86 18.3
74 30.5
Device connector
Detail X
valve actuator to
DIN EN 175301-803 Only SKP25.401...
design A, double pole + Device connector
end switch to
DIN EN 175301-803
106
87
74

9
4.8
64
105.1
148
26/30

Dimensions in mm
Actuator SKP25.7…
without SQS37
motorized setpoint
adjuster
71.7
32.5 Rp1/4
ISO 228 G3/4
min. 7
Rp 1/4
AIR
Pressure nozzle
16.5
221
202
207
X
188
168
Hexagon socket A/F4 83
7643m11e/1005
9
M5 15.8
64 18.3
86
30,5
74 6,3
valve actuator to
DIN EN 175301-803 Only SKP25.701...
design A, double pole + Device connector
end switch to
DIN EN 175301-803
4,8
106
74
87
103.7
146.7 Tightening torque
M3 central fixing screw 0.4 Nm
18
27/30

Dimensions in mm
Actuators SKP55...
92.7
58.2
32.5 50
Rp1/4
Rp1/4
+Air ATMOSPHERE
Pressure nozzle
233
207
202
168
188
83
Hexagon socket A/F4

9
7643m09e/1005
M5 15.9
86 18.2
64
Rp1/4
Device connector 30.5

valve actuator to 6.3
DIN EN 175301-803
Detail X
106
87
74
Only SKP55.001...
Device connector
switch to
DIN EN 175301-803
9
74
126
9
4.8
169
Tightening torque
M3
18
28/30

Dimensions in mm
Actuators SKP75...
58.4
32.5
Rp1/4
Rp1/4
Pressure nozzle
Rp1/4
242
269
X
202
188
188
83
Hexagon socket A/F4
7643m10e/1005
9
M5 15.8
86 18.3
64
Device connector end switch to

30.5 DIN EN 175301-803
Device connector 6.3 design A, triple pole +
valve actuator to
DIN EN 175301-803 Detail X
146
Only SKP75.001...
87
74
Device connector
end switch to
DIN EN 175301-803
9
74
4.8
126
169
Tightening torque
M3
18
29/30

Dimensions in mm
Connecting cable - For 2 actuators mounted on a valve

AGA62.000A000
N
Contact designation
L2
PE
PE
1 2
Connector side 2 1
(female)
L1 N
32
25
210 10
Tightening torque
L1
L2
PE
Plug side
(male)
7643m01e/1005
N
Connection diagram
L1 L2 N PE
L1 N PE L2 N PE
©2006 Siemens Building Technologies HVAC Products GmbH

30/30 Subject to change!

(* 6(5,(6
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
62/(12,'*$69$/9(6:,7+µ$1' This series of solenoid valves are of normally closed type,
suitable for civil and industrial applications, supplied with
µ &211(&7,216 $1' 23(5$7,1* alternate or direct current. These valves are divided into
35(6685(8372EDU two groups: with 8mm or 10mm orifice.
Gas valves, marked with “ S” or “ L” after type reference,
have coil operating in direct current, which permitted to
make its actions as silent as possible.
There is the possibility to have valves provided with inlet
pressure plug or outlet pressure plug (excluding G1/4”
connection ones) and, 10mm orifice only, valves equipped
with hydraulic lag group, which permits slow opening; in
this case it is also possible to have a quick and adjustable
opening initial flow.
Gas valves of this series, conforming to EN161, have a CE
type Certificate (CE Reg. N° 63AQ0626) in accordance to
European Directives 90/396 and 93/68.
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Class: A
Group: 2
Supply voltage (1): 230Vac / 50-60Hz
110Vac / 50-60Hz
Operating temperature: -10°C / +60°C
Closing time: ≤ 1s
Opening time: ≤ 1s (quick opening
versions only)
Mounting: vertical and horizontal
Body: die-cast brass
(1) Versions with different supply voltages are available.
INSTALLATION
• Respect the applicable national and European
standards (e.g. EN60335-1) regarding electrical safety.
• Assemble the valve to the installation so that the arrow
on the valve body has the same direction as the fuel
flow.
• During the assembly of the valve to the installation
piping, avoid twisting on the sheath and always use an
hexagonal key to be fitted to the valve body.
• Make sure that no foreign matters have entered the
valve body.
• Make sure that the max. fuel input pressure never
exceeds the value appearing on the label.
AC858 rev.03 1/4

DIRECTIONS FOR E6G*L... VALVES ADJUSTMENT DIRECTIONS FOR E6G*SR... VALVES ADJUSTMENT
Flow adjustment Flow adjustment

To adjust the gas flow, you have to remove one of the two Rotate clockwise the screw marked with 1 in Fig.2 to
screws used to fasten the lag group (the not enamelled reduce the flow, rotate in the opposite direction to increase
one, marked with 4 in Fig.1) and rotate clockwise the whole the same.
group to reduce the flow or in the opposite direction to
increase it.
Opening time adjustment

After removing the top protection, by rotating it
counterclockwise, you have to act on the adjustment screw,
marked with 1 in Fig.1; by rotating clockwise, the opening
time becomes longer, by rotating in the opposite direction,
the opening time becomes shorter.
Quick release initial flow adjustment 1

After removing the top protection by rotating it
counterclockwise, if you rotate clockwise the nut marked
with 2 in Fig.1, the initial release will be reduced; if you
rotate the same nut counterclockwise, the initial release
will be increased.
2 1 Fig.2
3
4
Fig.1
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
2/4 AC858 rev.03

SUMMARY TABLE
Type Operating Orifice Connections Weight Coil Consumptio Consumptio Flow (m³/h Possibility to
pressure diamete (g) n n gas with fit pressure
(mbar) r (mm) (VA) (VA) ∆P2.5mbar) test point
230Vac 110Vac
E6G*S10 0 ÷ 500 10 G3/8" 760 BE6*GMO 20 18 3.9 Yes
E6G*S10 0 ÷ 500 10 G1/2" 730 BE6*GMO 20 18 3.9 Yes
E6G*S10 0 ÷ 500 10 G3/8" 740 BE6*CFD 20 18 3.9 Yes
E6G*S10 0 ÷ 500 10 G1/2" 710 BE6*CFD 20 18 3.9 Yes
E6G*SR10 0 ÷ 500 10 G3/8" 765 BE6*GMO 20 18 3.9 Yes
E6G*SR10 0 ÷ 500 10 G1/2" 735 BE6*GMO 20 18 3.9 Yes
E6G*SR10 0 ÷ 500 10 G3/8" 745 BE6*CFD 20 18 3.9 Yes
E6G*SR10 0 ÷ 500 10 G1/2" 715 BE6*CFD 20 18 3.9 Yes
E6G*L 0 ÷ 200 10 G3/8" 865 BE6*GMO 20 18 3.9 Yes
E6G*L 0 ÷ 200 10 G1/2" 835 BE6*GMO 20 18 3.9 Yes
E6G*S8 0 ÷ 1000 8 G1/4" 620 BE6*GMOC 20 18 2 No
E6G*S8 0 ÷ 500 8 G3/8" 725 BE6*GMOC 20 18 2 Yes
E6G*S8 0 ÷ 500 8 G1/2" 695 BE6*GMOC 20 18 2 Yes
E6G*S8 0 ÷ 1000 8 G1/4" 640 BE6*GMO 20 18 2 No
E6G*S8 0 ÷ 1000 8 G3/8" 745 BE6*GMO 20 18 2 Yes
E6G*S8 0 ÷ 1000 8 G1/2" 715 BE6*GMO 20 18 2 Yes
E6G*S8 0 ÷ 1000 8 G1/4" 620 BE6*CFD 20 18 2 No
E6G*S8 0 ÷ 1000 8 G3/8" 725 BE6*CFD 20 18 2 Yes
E6G*S8 0 ÷ 1000 8 G1/2" 695 BE6*CFD 20 18 2 Yes
E6G*SR8 0 ÷ 1000 8 G1/4" 625 BE6*GMOC 20 18 2 No
E6G*SR8 0 ÷ 500 8 G3/8" 730 BE6*GMOC 20 18 2 Yes
E6G*SR8 0 ÷ 500 8 G1/2" 700 BE6*GMOC 20 18 2 Yes
E6G*SR8 0 ÷ 1000 8 G1/4" 645 BE6*GMO 20 18 2 No
E6G*SR8 0 ÷ 1000 8 G3/8" 750 BE6*GMO 20 18 2 Yes
E6G*SR8 0 ÷ 1000 8 G1/2" 720 BE6*GMO 20 18 2 Yes
E6G*SR8 0 ÷ 1000 8 G1/4" 625 BE6*CFD 20 18 2 No
E6G*SR8 0 ÷ 1000 8 G3/8" 730 BE6*CFD 20 18 2 Yes
E6G*SR8 0 ÷ 1000 8 G1/2" 700 BE6*CFD 20 18 2 Yes
E6G*A10 0 ÷ 950 10 G3/8" 675 BE6*A3C 20 18 3.9 Yes
E6G*A10 0 ÷ 950 10 G1/2" 645 BE6*A3C 20 18 3.9 Yes
E6G*A10 0 ÷ 950 10 G3/8" 695 BE6*AFD 20 18 3.9 Yes
E6G*A10 0 ÷ 950 10 G1/2" 665 BE6*AFD 20 18 3.9 Yes
AC858 rev.03 3/4

TYPE REFERENCE
E6G * S R P 10*½ * G MO 7 230/50-60
Supply voltage
Ref. Description
Type 110/50-60 110Vac/50-60Hz
230/50-60 230Vac/50-60Hz
Opening type (fast/slow)

Test pressure point
Ref. Description
Ref. Position
A Fast opening valve.
S Fast, silent opening valve. 5 Outlet left
L Slow, silent opening valve 6 Outlet right
(this version is inclusive of 7 Inlet left
flow adjuster). 8 Inlet right
Connecion type
Type Description
2C Connection with two core
Flow adjustment cable-IP65.
3C Connection with three core
Valve fitted with equipment for
cable- IP65.
flow adjustment.
FP Connection with flat fast-on.
FD Connection with fast-on for
Pressure plug plug DIN43650-IP65.
Valve inclusive of pressure plug. MO Connection with terminal
board-IP54.
MOC Connection with terminal
Body Type board (short conveyors)-
IP54.
Body Connections Orifice
8*1/4 G1/4” 8 mm Winding type
8*3/8 G3/8” 8 mm
8*1/2 G1/2” 8 mm Type Description
10*3/8 G3/8” 10 mm A Supply in alternate current.
10*1/2 G1/2” 10 mm C Supply in direct current.
G Supply in alternate current,
but valve operates in direct
current thanks to an
embodied rectification
bridge.
BRAHMA S.p.A.
Via del Pontiere, 31
37045 Legnago (VR)
Tel. +39 0442 635211 - Telefax +39 0442 25683 - 635256 00/08/22 Subject to amendments without notice
http://www.brahma.it
E-mail : brahma@brahma.it
4/4 AC858 rev.03

Capitolo - Chapter
FILTRO GAS TIPO FM - FMC - FGM - FF Chapìtre - Capitulo
FM - FMC - FGM - FF GAS FILTERS
FILTRE DE GAZ TYPE FM - FMC - FGM - FF
FILTROS DE GAS SERIE FM - FMC - FGM - FF 24
FM - FMC - FGM - FF
0051
0497
DESCRIZIONE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION DESCRIPCIÓN
E’ un dispositivo che impedisce il passaggio It is a device that prevents the passage of Les filtres pour gaz éliminent les particules Dispositivo que impide el paso de partículas
di particelle di polvere o detriti portati dal a particles of dust or debris brought by the de poussière portées par le gaz et protègent de polvo o impurezas contenidas en el gas,
gas proteggendo i dispositivi di regolazione gas, protecting the regulation and safety les éléments en danger (brûleurs, compteurs protegiendo así los dispositivos de regulación
e sicurezza. device. et régulateurs) d’une obstruction rapide. y seguridad.
E' composto da una cartuccia filtrante FM gas filters have a large filtering component Filtre pour gaz est composé d’une cartouche Es compuesto por un cartucho filtrante de
ampiamente dimensionata e realizzata in made of synthetical washable material which filtrante réalisée en matériau synthétique material sintético lavable y es completamente
materiale sintetico lavabile; è completamente is fully removable for complete inspection lavable; il est complètement extractible pour extraíble para una inspección y limpieza
estraibile per una totale ispezione e pulizia. and cleaning. l’inspection complète et le nettoyage. completas.
Ciò è notevolmente facilitato dalle tenute Special O-Ring sealings, resistant to third gas Cela est facilité par les joints d’étanchéité Estas operaciones son sumamente facilitadas
appositamente realizzate con anelli di tipo family, make easy removal. tout spécialement réalisés avec des bagues por la presencia de juntas tóricas, resistentes
O-Ring resistenti anche ai gas della terza de type joints toriques qui résistent aussi aux también a los gases de la tercera familia.
famiglia. gaz de la troisième famille.
Ogni filtro MADAS consente la misurazione MADAS filters permits upstream pressure Chaque filtre MADAS permet le mesurage Es posible efectuar la medición de la presión
della pressione a monte tramite un apposito measurement through an appropriate de la pression en haut grâce à une fixation en los puntos anteriores de la linea, a través
attacco a norma. standard connection. spécisle. de una conexion expresamente provista
según la norma.
Omologazione CE secondo EN 126 EC certified according to EN 126 Homologation CE selon EN 126 Homologación CE según EN 126
Conforme Direttiva 2009/142/CE In conformity with the 2009/142/EC Conforme à la Directive 2009/142/CE Conforme Directiva 2009/142/CE
(Direttiva Gas) Directive (Gas Directive) (Directive Gaz) (Directiva Gas)
Conforme Direttiva 97/23/CE In conformity with the 97/23/EC Conforme à la Directive 97/23/CE Conforme Directiva 97/23/CE
(Direttiva PED) Directive (PED Directive) (Directive PED) (Directiva PED)
Madas Technical Manual

FM - FGM 1
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
Chapìtre - Capitulo
FILTRO GAS TIPO FM - FMC - FGM - FF
24 FILTRE DE GAZ TYPE FM - FMC - FGM - FF

FILTROS DE GAS SERIE FM - FMC - FGM - FF
CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE TECHNICAL DATA CARACTERISTIQUES TECHNIQUES CARATTERISTICAS TECNICAS
• Impiego: • Use: • Emploi: • Utilizaciòn:

gas non aggressivi delle 3 famiglie not aggressive gases of the 3 families gaz non agressifs des trois familles gases de las 3 familias
(gas secchi) (dry gases) (gaz secs) (secos y no agresivos)
• Attacchi filettati Rp: • Threaded connections Rp: • Fixations filetees Rp: • Conexiones roscadas Rp:
(DN 15 ÷ DN 50) secondo EN 10226 (DN 15 ÷ DN 50) according to EN 10226 (DN 15 ÷ DN 50) selon EN 10226 (DN 15 ÷ DN 50) según EN 10226
• Attacchi flangiati PN 16: • Flanged connections PN 16: • Fixations bridees PN 16: • Conexiones de brida PN 16:
(DN 65 ÷ DN 300) secondo ISO 7005 (DN 65 ÷ DN 300) according to ISO 7005 (DN 65 ÷ DN 300) selon ISO 7005 (DN 65 ÷ DN 300) según ISO 7005
• Su richiesta attacchi flangiati ANSI 150 • On request ANSI 150 flanged connections • Sur demande fixations bridees ANSI 150 • A petición conexiones de brida ANSI 150
• Pressione max esercizio: • Max. working pressure: • Pression maximale en exercice: • Max. presion ejercicio:
2 bar o 6 bar (vedere etichetta prodotto) 2 bar or 6 bar (see product label) 2 bar ou 6 bar (Voir étiquette du produit) 2 bar o 6 bar (ver etiqueta producto)
• Temperatura ambiente: • Environment temperature: • Température ambiante: • Temperatura ambiente:

-20 ÷ +70 °C -20 ÷ +70 °C -20 ÷ +70 °C -20 ÷ +70 °C
• Gruppo: • Group: • Groupe: • Grupo:

2 2 2 2
• Filtraggio: • Filtration: • Filtrage: • Filtración:

50 µm - 20 µm - 10 µm 50 µm - 20 µm - 10 µm 50 µm - 20 µm - 10 µm 50 µm - 20 µm - 10 µm
MATERIALI MATERIALS MATÉRIELS MATERIALES
• Alluminio pressofuso (UNI EN 1706) • Die-cast aluminium (UNI EN 1706) • Alluminium fondé dans la masse • Aluminio inyectado a presiòn
(UNI EN 1706) (UNI EN 1706)

• ottone OT-58 (UNI EN 12164) • OT-58 brass (UNI EN 12164) • laiton OT-58 (UNI EN 12164) • latòn OT-58 (UNI EN 12164)

• alluminio 11S (UNI 9002-5) • 11S aluminium (UNI 9002-5) • alluminium 11S (UNI 9002-5) • aluminio 11S (UNI 9002-5)

• acciaio zincato e acciaio INOX 430 F • galvanized and 430 F stainless steel • acier zingué et acier INOX 430 F • acero inox 430 F y galvanizado
(UNI EN 10088) (UNI EN 10088) (UNI EN 10088) (UNI EN 10088)

• gomma antiolio NBR (UNI 7702) • NBR rubber (UNI 7702) • caoutchou anti-huile NBR (UNI 7702) • goma antiaceite NBR (UNI 7702)

• nylon 30% fibra di vetro • nylon 30% glass fibre • nylon 30% fibre de verre • nylon 30% fibra de vidrio
(UNI EN ISO 11667) (UNI EN ISO 11667) (UNI EN ISO 11667) (UNI EN ISO 11667)

• viledon • viledon • viledon • viledon
MODELLI MODELS MODELES VERSIONES
A = Senza prese di pressione o tappi A = Without pressure nipples or caps A = Sans prises de pression ou bouchons A = Sin tomas de presión o tapones
B = 1 Presa di pressione G 1/8" in entrata B = Inlet G 1/8" pressure nipple B = Prise de pression G 1/8" en ’entrée B = 1 Toma de presión G 1/8" en entrada
D = Presa di pressione G 1/8" in entrata e uscita D = Inlet and outlet G 1/8" pressure nipple D = Prise de pression G 1/8" en entrée/sortie D = Toma de presión G 1/8" en entrada/salida
F = 1 Tappo G 1/8" in entrata F = Inlet G 1/8" cap F = 1 Bouchon G 1/8" en entrée F = 1 Tapón G 1/8" en entrada
H = Tappo G 1/8" in entrata e uscita H = Inlet and outlet G 1/8" cap H = Bouchon G 1/8" en entrée/sortie H = Tapón G 1/8" en entrada/salida
I = 4 Tappi G 1/4" I = 4 G 1/4" caps I = 4 Bouchons G 1/4" I = 4 Tapones G 1/4"
L = 2 Prese di Pressione + 2 Tappi G 1/8" L = 2 G 1/8" pressure nipples and 2 G 1/8" caps L = 2 Prises de Pression + 2 Bouchons G 1/8" L = 2 Tomas de presión + 2 Tapones G 1/8"
M = Presa di pressione G 1/4" in entrata e uscita M = Inlet and outlet G 1/4" pressure nipple M = Prise de pression G 1/4" en entrée/sortie M = Toma de presión G 1/4" en entrada/salida
N = 4 Prese di pressione G 1/4" N = 4 G 1/4" pressure nipples N = 4 Prises de pression G 1/4" N = 4 Tomas de presión G 1/4"
O = 2 Prese di Pressione + 2 Tappi G 1/4" O = 2 G 1/4" pressure nipples and 2 G 1/4" caps O = 2 Prises de pression + 2 Bouchons G 1/4" O = 2 Tomas de presión + 2 Tapones G 1/4"
J = Tappo G 1/4” in entrata e uscita J = Inlet and outlet G 1/4” cap J = Bouchon G 1/4" en entrée/sortie J = Tapón G 1/8" en entrada/salida
2 FM - FGM
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
Attacchi - Connections - Fixations - Conexiones
DN 65 - DN 80 - DN 100
DN 15 - DN 20 - DN 25
DN 15 - DN 20 - DN 25
DN 32 - DN 40 - DN 50
DN 25M * - DN 32
DN 25M * - DN 32
DN 200 - DN 300
DN 125 - DN 150
FMC COMPACT
DN 40 - DN 50
DN 40 - DN 50
Modello
Model
Modèle
Versión
FGM
FM
FM
FM
FM
FF

FM - FGM 3
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter

Attacchi - Connections - Fixations - Conexiones
DN 65 - DN 80 - DN 100
DN 15 - DN 20 - DN 25
DN 15 - DN 20 - DN 25
DN 32 - DN 40 - DN 50
DN 25M * - DN 32
DN 25M * - DN 32
DN 200 - DN 300
DN 125 - DN 150
FMC COMPACT
DN 40 - DN 50
DN 40 - DN 50
Modello
Model
Modèle
Versión
FGM
FM
FM
FM
FM
FF
4 FM - FGM
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
Attacchi Filettati - Threaded Connections
P. max 2 bar
Fixations filetees - Conexiones roscadas
Filtraggio 50 micron Filtraggio 20 micron Filtraggio 10 micron

Attacchi
Foto Connections
Filtering 50 micron Filtering 20 micron Filtering 10 micron
Photo Fixations
Codice Codice Codice
Conexiones
Code Code Code
FMC compact DN 15 FMC02 B50 FMC02 B20 FMC02 B10
DN 20 FMC03 B50 FMC03 B20 FMC03 B10
DN 25 FMC04 B50 FMC04 B20 FMC04 B10
FM DN 15 FM02 B50 FM02 B20 FM02 B10
DN 20 FM03 B50 FM03 B20 FM03 B10
DN 25 FM04 B50 FM04 B20 FM04 B10
FM FM DN 25M * FM04M B50 FM04M B20 FM04M B10
FM DN 32 FM05 B50 FM05 B20 FM05 B10
FM DN 40 FM06 B50 FM06 B20 FM06 B10
FM
FM DN 50 FM07 B50 FM07 B20 FM07 B10
FGM DN 25M * FGM04M B50 - -

FGM
FGM DN 32 FGM05 B50 - -
FGM DN 40 FGM06 B50 - -
FGM DN 50 FGM07 B50 - -
Attacchi Flangiati - Flanged Connections

P. max 2 bar
Fixations Bridees - Conexiones de Brida
FM DN 25 FM25 B50 FM25 B20 FM25 B10
FM DN 25M * FM25M B50 FM25M * B20 FM25M * B10
FGM DN 25M * FGM25M B50 - -
FF DN 32 FF32 B50 - -
FF DN 40 FF40 B50 - -
FF DN 50 FF50 B50 - -
FM DN 65 FF08 B50 FF08 B20 FF08 B10
FM DN 80 FF09 B50 FF09 B20 FF09 B10
FM DN 100 FF10 B50 FF10 B20 FF10 B10
FM DN 125 - - FF11 B10
FM DN 150 - - FF12 B10
FM DN 200 - - FF13 M10
FM DN 300 - - FF15 M10

FM - FGM 5
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter

Attacchi Filettati - Threaded Connections

P. max 6 bar
Fixations filetees - Conexiones roscadas
Filtraggio 50 micron Filtraggio 20 micron Filtraggio 10 micron

Attacchi
Foto Connections
Filtering 50 micron Filtering 20 micron Filtering 10 micron
Photo Fixations
Codice Codice Codice
Conexiones
Code Code Code
FMC compact DN 15 FMC020000 B50 FMC020000 B20 FMC020000 B10

DN 20 FMC030000 B50 FMC030000 B20 FMC030000 B10
DN 25 FMC040000 B50 FMC040000 B20 FMC040000 B10
FM DN 15 FM020000 B50 FM020000 B20 FM020000 B10

DN 20 FM030000 B50 FM030000 B20 FM030000 B10
DN 25 FM040000 B50 FM040000 B20 FM040000 B10
FM FM DN 25M * FM04M0000 B50 FM04M0000 B20 FM04M0000 B10
FM DN 32 FM050000 B50 FM050000 B20 FM050000 B10
FM DN 40 FM060000 B50 FM060000 B20 FM060000 B10
FM
FM DN 50 FM070000 B50 FM070000 B20 FM070000 B10
FGM DN 25M * FGM04M0000 B50 - -

FGM
FGM DN 32 FGM050000 B50 - -
FGM DN 40 FGM060000 B50 - -
FGM DN 50 FGM070000 B50 - -
Attacchi Flangiati - Flanged Connections

P. max 6 bar
Fixations Bridees - Conexiones de Brida
FM DN 25 FM250000 B50 FM25 B20 FM25 B10
FM DN 25M * FM25M0000 B50 FM25M * B20 FM25M * B10
FGM DN 25M * FGM25M0000 B50 - -
FF DN 32 FF320000 B50 - -
FF DN 40 FF400000 B50 - -
FF DN 50 FF500000 B50 - -
FM DN 65 FF080000 B50 FF08 B20 FF08 B10
FM DN 80 FF090000 B50 FF09 B20 FF09 B10
FM DN 100 FF100000 B50 FF10 B20 FF10 B10
FM DN 125 - - FF11 B10
FM DN 150 - - FF12 B10
FM DN 200 - - FF13 M10
FM DN 300 - - FF15 M10
6 FM - FGM
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
fig. 1 FMC DN 15 ÷ 25
fig. 1, 2 e 3 fig. 1, 2 and 3
1 - Coperchio / Fondello 1 - Cover / Bottom

2 - Organo filtrante 2 - Filtering organ
3 - Corpo 3 - Body
4 - Guide di sistemazione 4 - Slotting guides
5 - Viti di fissaggio 5 - Fixing screws
6 - O-Ring di tenuta 6 - Seal O-Ring
7 - Presa di pressione 7 - Pressure nipple
fig. 1, 2 et 3 fig. 1, 2 y 3
1 - Couvercle / Basement 1 - Tapa / Fondo

2 - Composant filtrant 2 - Elemento filtrante
3 - Corps 3 - Cuerpo
4 - Guides 4 - Guías de ubicación
vista dall’alto senza coperchio 5 - Vis de fixation 5 - Tornillos de fijación
view from above without cover 6 - O-Ring de tenue 6 - Junta tórica de estanquidad
vue du haut sans couvercle 7 - Prise de pression 7 - Toma de presión
vista superior sin tapa
FM DN 32 ÷ 50
fig. 3
FM DN 15 ÷ 25
fig. 2
vista dall’alto senza coperchio

view from above without cover
vue du haut sans couvercle


FM - FGM 7
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter

FGM DN 25 ÷ 50 FM DN 65 ÷ 100
fig. 4
fig. 5

FM DN 125 ÷ 300

fig. 4,5 e 6 fig. 4, 5 and 6
fig. 6 1 - Coperchio / Fondello 1 - Cover / Bottom

2 - Organo filtrante 2 - Filtering organ
3 - Corpo 3 - Body
4 - Guide di sistemazione 4 - Slotting guides
5 - Viti di fissaggio 5 - Fixing screws
6 - O-Ring di tenuta 6 - Seal O-Ring
7 - Presa di pressione 7 - Pressure nipple
8 - Alette speciali 8 - Special tongues
fig. 4,5 et 6 fig. 4,5 y 6
1 - Couvercle / Basement 1 - Tapa / Fondo

2 - Composant filtrant 2 - Elemento filtrante
3 - Corps 3 - Cuerpo
4 - Guides 4 - Guías de ubicación
5 - Vis de fixation 5 - Tornillos de fijación
6 - O-Ring de tenue 6 - Junta tórica de estanquidad
7 - Prise de pression 7 - Toma de presión
8 - Ailettes spéciales 8 - Aletas especiales

8 FM - FGM
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
DIAGRAMMA PERDITE DI CARICO FMC - FM - FGM (filtraggio 50 μm) - FMC - FM - FGM PRESSURE DROPS DIAGRAM (filtering 50 μm)
DIAGRAMME PERTES DE CHARGE FMC - FM - FGM (filtrage 50 μm) - DIAGRAMA DE CAUDALES FMC - FM - FGM (filtración 50 μm)
5*
-2
1) metano
2) aria
3) gas di città
4) gpl
1) methane
2) air
3) town gas
4) lpg
1) méthane
2) air
3) gaz de ville
4) gaz liquide
1) methane
2) aire
3) gas de ciudad
4) glp
* versione compact - compact version - version compact - versión compact # attacchi DN 25 con corpo DN 32 - DN 25 connections with DN 32 body - fixations DN 25 avec un corps DN 32 - conexiones DN 25 con cuerpo DN 32
DIAGRAMMA PERDITE DI CARICO FMC - FM - FGM (filtraggio 20 μm) - FMC - FM - FGM PRESSURE DROPS DIAGRAM (filtering 20 μm)
DIAGRAMME PERTES DE CHARGE FMC - FM - FGM (filtrage 20 μm) - DIAGRAMA DE CAUDALES FMC - FM - FGM (filtración 20 μm)
5*
1) metano
-2
2) aria
3) gas di città
4) gpl
1) methane
2) air
3) town gas
4) lpg
1) méthane
2) air
3) gaz de ville
4) gaz liquide
1) methane
2) aire
3) gas de ciudad
4) glp

FM - FGM 9
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter

DIAGRAMMA PERDITE DI CARICO FMC - FM (filtraggio 10 μm) - FMC - FM PRESSURE DROPS DIAGRAM (filtering 10 μm)
DIAGRAMME PERTES DE CHARGE FMC - FM (filtrage 10 μm) - DIAGRAMA DE CAUDALES FMC - FM (filtración 10 μm)
5*
-2
5
12
DN
1) metano 1) methane 1) méthane 1) methane

2) aria 2) air 2) air 2) aire
3) gas di città 3) town gas 3) gaz de ville 3) gas de ciudad
4) gpl 4) lpg 4) gaz liquide 4) glp
10 FM - FGM
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
Misure di ingombro in mm DN25M = attacchi DN 25 con corpo DN 32
Overall dimensions in mm DN25M = DN 25 connections with DN 32 body
Mesures d’encombrement en mm DN25M = fixations DN 25 avec un corps DN 32
DN25M = conexiones DN 25 con cuerpo DN 32
Dimensiones en mm
Tipo Attacchi filettati Attacchi flangiati superficie filtrante (mm2)

Type Threaded sizes Flanged connections filtering surface (mm2)
A B Kg
Type Fixations filetees Fixations bridees filtre de surface (mm2)
Tipo Conexiones roscadas Conexiones de brida superficie del filtro (mm2)
FMC DN 15 (compact) - 70 63 0,35 3890
FMC DN 20 (compact) - 70 63 0,35 3890
FMC DN 25 (compact) 70 63 0,35 3890
FM DN 15 - 120 72 0,5 4560
FM DN 20 - 120 72 0,5 4560
FM DN 25 - 120 72 0,5 4560
FM DN 25M 160 87 1,25 19040
FM DN 32 - 160 87 1,2 19040
FM DN 40 - 160 87 1,2 19040
FM DN 50 - 160 110 1,35 26770
FM - DN 25 192 115 3,2 19040
FF - DN 32 230 150 2,5 10650
FF - DN 40 230 150 2,5 10650
FF - DN 50 230 150 2,5 10650
FGM DN 25M 160 135 1,4 10650
FGM DN 32 160 135 1,35 10650
FGM DN 40 160 135 1,35 10650
FGM DN 50 160 135 1,35 10650
FM - DN 65 290 180 5,3 39240
FM - DN 80 310 195 5,7 39240
FM - DN 100 350 211 9,8 (P. max. 2 Bar) 15 (P. max 6 Bar) 76250
FM - DN 125 480 302 25 198000
FM - DN 150 480 302 26,2 198000
FM - DN 200 600 380 50 -
FM - DN 300 737 510 90 -
FM FGM FMC
FM
FF

FM - FGM 11
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter

INSTALLAZIONE INSTALLATION INSTALLATION INSTALACIÓN

Si raccomanda di leggere It is always important to read Lire attentivement les Se recomienda leer
attentamente il foglio di istruzioni carefully the instruction sheet instructions pour chaque atentamente la hoja de
a corredo di ogni prodotto. of each product. produit. instrucciones adjuntas con el
producto.
ATTENZIONE: le operazioni di WARNING: all installation/ ATTENTION: les opérations ATENCIÓN. Las operaciones de
installazione/manutenzione devono maintenance work must be carried out d’installation/entretien doivent être instalación y mantenimiento deben ser
essere eseguite da personale qualificato. by skilled staff. exécutées par du personnel qualifié. efectuadas por personal cualificado.
• E’ necessario chiudere il gas prima • The gas supply must be shut off before • Fermer le gaz avant l’installation. • Antes de iniciar las operaciones de
dell’installazione. installation. instalación es necesario cerrar el gas.
• Verificare che la pressione di linea NON • Check that the line pressure DOES NOT • Vérifier que la pression de ligne NE SOIT • Verificar que la presión de la línea NO
SIA SUPERIORE alla pressione EXCEED the maximum pressure stated PAS SUPÉRIEURE à la pression SEA SUPERIOR a la presión máxima
massima dichiarata sull’etichetta del on the product label. maximum déclarée sur l’étiquette du indicada en la etiqueta del producto.
prodotto. produit.
• Il filtro è normalmente posizionato a • The filter is normally installed upstream the • Le filtre est normalement situé en amont de • El filtro viene normalmente posicionado río
monte di tutti gli organi di regolazione e regulation organs and the interception tous les organes de réglage et d’arrêt. Il arriba de todos los órganos de regulación
intercettazione. Deve essere installato device. It must be installed with the arrow doit être installé avec la flèche (en relief y interceptación. Debe ser instalado con
con la freccia (in rilievo sul corpo in (on the body valve) towards the user. sur le corps ou sur le couvercle) tournée la flecha (en relieve en el cuerpo de
alluminio o sul coperchio) rivolta verso vers le tuyau principal. aluminio o en la tapa) hacia el punto de
l’utenza. consumo.
• Può essere installato in qualsiasi posizione • It can be installed in any position without • Il peut être installé dans n’importe quelle • Se puede instalar en cualquier posición sin
senza che ne venga pregiudicato il corretto compromising the correct working. position sans que son fonctionnement perjudicar el correcto funcionamiento.
funzionamento. All’esterno del filtro Outside the filter there is a checking correct soit compromis. A l’extérieur du Al exterior del filtro está una toma de
è sistemata una presa di pressione per pressure-tap. filtre est installée une prise de pression presión por el eventual control.
l’eventuale controllo. pour l’éventuel contrôle.
• Durante l’installazione evitare che detriti • During installation take care not to allow • Pendant l’installation, éviter que des • Durante la instalación prestar atención
o residui metallici penetrino all’interno debris or scraps of metal to enter the détritus ou des résidus métalliques a fin de evitar que detritos o residuos
dell’apparecchio. device. pénètrent dans l’appareil. metálicos se introduzcan en el aparato.
• Se l’apparecchio è filettato verificare che • If the device is threaded check that the • Si l’appareil est fileté, vérifier que le filet • En el caso de aparato roscado será
la lunghezza del filetto della tubazione pipeline thread is not too long; overlong de la tuyauterie ne soit pas trop long necesario verificar que la longitud de
non sia eccessiva per non danneggiare threads may damage the body of the pour ne pas endommager le corps de la rosca de la tubería no sea excesiva
il corpo dell’apparecchio in fase di device when screwed into place. l’appareil lors du vissage. dado que, durante el enroscado, podría
avvitamento. provocar daños en el cuerpo del aparato
mismo.
• Se l’apparecchio è flangiato verificare che • If the device is flanged check that the • Si l’appareil est bridé, vérifier que les • En el caso de aparato embridado,
le controflange di ingresso e uscita siano inlet and outlet counterflanges are contre-brides d’entrée et de sortie será necesario controlar que las
perfettamente parallele per evitare perfectly parallel to avoid unnecessary soient parfaitement parallèles pour contrabridas de entrada y de salida
di sottoporre il corpo a inutili sforzi mechanical stresses on the body of éviter de soumettre le corps à des queden perfectamente paralelas a fin
meccanici, calcolare inoltre lo spazio the device. Also calculate the space efforts mécaniques inutiles; par ailleurs, de evitar que el cuerpo quede sometido
per l’inserimento della guarnizione di needed to fit the seal. If the gap left calculer l’espace pour l’introduction du a fuerzas mecánicas inútiles. Calcular
tenuta. Se a guarnizioni inserite lo spazio after the seal is fitted is too wide, do joint d’étanchéité. Si, lorsque les joints además el espacio para la introducción
rimanente è eccessivo non cercare di not try to close it by over-tightening the sont introduits, l’espace restant est de la junta de estanqueidad. Si una
colmarlo stringendo eccessivamente i device’s bolts. excessif, ne pas essayer de le combler vez introducidas las juntas el espacio
bulloni dell’apparecchio. en serrant trop fort les boulons de restante es excesivo, no apretar
l’appareil. demasiado los pernos del aparato para
intentar reducirlo.
• In ogni caso dopo l’installazione verificare • Always check that the system is gas-tight • De toute façon, après l’installation vérifier • De todas formas, verificar la estanqueidad
la tenuta dell’impianto. after installation. l’étanchéité de l’installation. del sistema una vez efectuada la
instalación.
ESEMPIO DI INSTALLAZIONE EXAMPLE OF INSTALLATION EXEMPLE D’INSTALLATION EJEMPLO DE INSTALACIÓN
1. Valvola a strappo SM 1. SM series jerk handle ON/OFF valve 1. Soupape à déchirement SM 1. Válvula de corte SM
2. Filtro gas serie FM 2. FM series gas filter 2. Filtre gaz série FM 2. Filtro gas serie FM
3. Valvola di blocco MVB/1 MAX o MIN 3. MVB/1 MAX or MIN shut off valve 3. Soupape de bloc MVB/1 MAX ou MIN 3. Válvulas de bloqueo MVB/1 MAX o MIN
4. Regolatore gas serie RG/2MC 4. RG/2MC series pressure regulator 4. Régulateur gaz série RG/2MC 4. Regulador gas serie RG/2MC
5. Valvola di sfioro MVS/1 5. MVS/1 overflow valve 5. Soupape d’effleurement MVS/1 5. Válvula de alivio MVS/1
6. Leva comando a distanza valvola a strappo SM 6. Lever for remote SM ON/OFF valve control 6. Levier de comande à distance soupape à 6. Palanca para actuación de de la válvula
déchirement SM de corte SM
Scarico in aria libera

Free air exhaust
Evacuation à l’air libre
Escape en aire libre
utenza
rete - pipe user
réseau - red utilisateur
punto de consumo
12 FM - FGM
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
MANUTENZIONE SERVICING MANUTENTION MANTENIMIENTO
In ogni caso prima di effettuare verifiche interne In all cases, before performing any Avant de faire des vérifications internes, De todas formas, antes de efectuar
accertarsi che all'interno dell’apparecchio non internal checks make sure that there is no s’assurer qu’il n’y ait pas de gaz sous verificaciones internas, controlar que en su
vi sia gas in pressione. pressurised gas inside the device. pression dans l’appareil. interior no haya gas en presión.
Togliere il coperchio (1) svitando le viti Remove cover (1) and unscrew the fixing Enlever le couvercle (1) en dévissant les vis de Quitar la tapa (1) desenroscando los tornillos de
di fissaggio (5). Smontare la cartuccia screws (5). Disassemble the filter cartridge fixation (5). Démonter la cartouche filtrante fijación (5). Desmontar el cartucho filtrante (2),
filtrante (2), pulirla con acqua e sapone, (2), clean with soap and water, blow with (2), la nettoyer avec de l’eau et du savon et lavarlo con agua y jabón y soplarlo con aire
soffiarla con aria compressa (o sostituirla compressed air (or substitute if necessary) y souffler de l’air comprimé (ou la remplacer comprimido, o bien sustituirlo si es necesario,
se necessario) e rimontarla nella posizione and re-assemble in the original position si nécessaire); la remonter dans la position y volver a montarlo en su posición original,
iniziale controllando che sia sistemata tra checking that it is properly positioned in initiale en contrôlant qu’elle soit bien placée controlando que quede ubicado entre las
le apposite guide (4) controllando che non the guides (4), and check that it does not entre les guides (4) et qu’elle ne gêne pas le guías correspondientes (4) y que no impida la
ostacoli il montaggio del coperchio (1). prevent assembly of the cover (1). montage du couvercle (1). colocación de la tapa (1).
Infine rimontare il coperchio (1) facendo Lastly re-assemble the cover (1) making sure Remonter le couvercle (1) en faisant Por último, colocar la tapa (1) nuevamente
attenzione che l’O-Ring (6) sia sistemato that the O-ring (6) is in the correct position. attention que le joint torique (6) soit placé prestando atención en que la junta tórica
nell’apposita cava. dans son logement. de cierre (6) quede ubicada en la ranura
correspondiente.
Le suddette operazioni devono The above-said operations must Les opérations mentionnées ci- Las operaciones antes indicadas
essere eseguite esclusivamente da be carried out only by qualified dessus doivent être exécutées deben ser ejecutadas únicamente
tecnici qualificati. technicians. exclusivement par des techniciens por técnicos cualificados.
qualifiés.

FM - FGM 13
October 2011
CERTIFICATE
7 712
QRA10... QRA53..., QRA55... with clamp QRA2... with clamp
Flame Detectors QRA2...

QRA10...
QRA53...
QRA55...
Conformity to EEC directives

- Electromagnetic compatibility EMC (immunity) 89 / 336 EEC
ISO 9001: 2000 ISO 14001: 1996 Valid for QRA2...

Cert. 00739 Cert. 38233
For applications in U.S. / Canada, the flame detectors carry the and
CC1N7712en
LAMTEC | BurnerTronic BT300 | BT320 ... BT341
Approvals.
EC Type Examination Certificate (Module B)

according to Directive 97/23/EC
 DIN EN 298:2012
 DIN EN 13611
 DIN EN 1643
 DIN EN 12067-2
 ISO 23552-1
 DIN EN 50156-1, No. 10.5
0085
EC Type Examination Certificate
 EU/2009/142/EC
 DIN EN 298
 DIN EN 13611
 DIN EN 1643
 DIN EN 12067-2
SIL 3
 DIN EN 61508 Part 1-7 (BT331, BT341)
MH48669
Controls, Primary Safety Certified for Canada –
Component
 UL 372
 UL 1998
EC Declaration of Conformity
 2006/95/EC (Low Voltage Directive)
 2004/108/EC (EMC Directive)
 97/23/EC (Pressure Equipment Directive Cat. 4
Mod.) B+D
 2009/142/EC (Gas Appliances Directive)

Technical Booklet GB-ML 600 G em - Pesquera Landes Dalcahue - 010517 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Booklet GB-ML 600 G em - Pesquera Landes Dalcahue - 010517 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

COMPANY CERTIFIED ISO 9001

TOLLERANZE GENERALI PARTI SMUSSI E

Dis. N B04-0105-00 Pagina 1 di 1

Verniciatura / Rivestimento Revis. 00 Scala

Mat. Peso 289,01 kg Data 1:4

The monoblock structure includes:

NATURAL GAS TRAIN

- main electrovalves (2 pcs)

Built-in electric board for the burner command and control:

LOW NOx OPTION

950 - 5800 min-max [kW]

1.5 °E at 20 °C - 6 cSt at 20 °C °E - cSt

Data di scadenza dell’ultimo ciclo di certificazione:

Si c er tific a c he i l si s tem a di ges tion e di

GENERAL BRUCIATORI S.r.l.

È c on fo rm e all o St and a rd:

Q ue st a c e rtific az ion e è v al ida pe r i l se guen te c a m po app li c at iv o:

Luogo e Da ta: P er l'Or ga n ism o di Ce rtif ic az ione :

Ex p ir y da te of l as t c er tific at ion c y c le:

GENERAL BRUCIATORI S.r.l.

ha s be en f ou nd t o c on fo rm t o the Q ua lity M an agem ent Sy st em st an da rd:

T hi s c er tific at e i s v al id f o r t he f ol low ing sc op e :

P lac e an d dat e: For t h e issu ing of fic e:

Dichiariamo sotto la nostra esclusiva responsabilità che il bruciatore Industriale

o DIRETTIVA 2014/30/UE Compatibilità elettromagnetica

o DIRETTIVA 2014/35/EU sicurezza apparecchi elettrici in bassa tensione

o DIRETTIVA 2011/65/UE – 2015/863/UE (RoHS 2)

• All handling operations have to be carried out by specialised personnel.

FITTING THE BURNER TO THE BOILER

When installing the burner on to the boiler please proceed as follows:

MATCHING THE BURNER WITH THE COMBUSTION CHAMBER

3 PREMISES FOR A SUCCESSFUL INSTALLATION

Prior to proceeding to installation make sure that:

Height above Fan capacity

4) Fuel tubing must be built following General Bruciatori's diagrams.

- INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION OF THE BURNER

Do not obstruct suction or dissipation grids.

Electrical connections should always be made using flexible cables.

SERVOMOTORE ARIA SERVOMOTORE GAS

LED2 = TRAFFICO DATI CAN

LED3 = TENSIONE DI ALIMENTAZIONE ON

FU34 PROTEZIONE AUSILIARI S60 PRESSOSTATO LIMITI

HL95 PRESENZA FIAMMA S65 PRESSOSTATO MASSIMA GAS

KM81 MOTORE VENTILATORE S67 PRESSOSTATO ARIA COMBURENTE

LCM100 MODULO LOAD CONTROLLER SA60 SEL.BRUCIATORE ON - OFF

S64 PRESSOSTATO DI MINIMA GAS/PROVA VALVOLE SB62 EMERGENZA

SH34 SELETTORE CIRCUITI AUSILIARI SM104 SONDA MODULAZIONE 4-20mA

. SERVOMOTORE ARIA TAG88 TRASFORMATORE DI ACCENSIONE GAS

.. SERVOMOTORE GAS YV85 1^ E.V. PILOTA GAS

4) GAS DELIVERY SURVEY

5) GAUGE VALUE CORRECTION

USING THE BURNER

FIRST NATURAL GAS IGNITION

USING THE BURNER

The burner operation is completely automatic. Therefore no adjustment maneuver is required

ISTRUZIONI ORIGINALI (EN)

! IMPORTANT / NOTE i INFORMATION I WARNING / ATTENTION

SETTING THE BURNER CURVE..................................................................................................................................................2

SETTING THE BURNER CURVE

Initial home page: keep thermostat open. Burner remain in stand-by.

Unlock the controller: press ENTER.

Press ENTER again

Keep the password “0000“ and confirm with ENTER.